Siemens 270 series Technical data

Preface, Contents
SIMATIC HMI
Multi Panel MP 270B,
Touch Panel TP 270,
Operator Panel OP 270
Introduction
1
Functionality
2
Commissioning
3
Operation
4
Operating Screens and
Screen Objects
5
Recipes
6
Archives
7
System Settings
8
Installation
9
Dimensions
10
Options
11
Maintenance/Upkeep
12
Operating System Update
13
Equipment Manual
A
Appendices
D
Glossary, Index
Order No.: 6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
A5E00136825
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to
protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are marked as follows according to the level
of danger:
!
!
!
Danger
indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Warning
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Caution
used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury.
Caution
used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in property damage.
Notice
indicates that unwanted events or status can occur if the relevant information is not observed.
Note
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular
part of the documentation.
Qualified Personnel
Equipment may be commissioned and operated only by qualified personnel. Qualified personnel within the
meaning of the safety notices in this manual are persons who are authorized to commission, ground and identify equipment, systems and circuits in accordance with safety engeneering standards.
Correct Usage
Please note the following:
!
Warning
The device may only be used for the application cases specified in the catalog and the technical description
and may only be used in combination with third-party equipment and components recommended or approved
by Siemens.
Startup must not take place until it is established that the machine which is to accommodate this component is
conforms with the guideline 98/37 EC.
Appropriate transport, and appropriate storage, installation and assembly, as well as careful operation and
maintenance, are required to ensure that the product operates perfectly and safely.
Trademarks
The registered trademarks of the Siemens AG can be found in the preface. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks, whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Impressum
Editor and Publisher: A&D PT1 D1
Copyright Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved
Exclusion of Liability
The transmission and reproduction of this documentation and the exploitation
and communication of its contents are not permitted without express
authority. Offenders will be liable for compensation for damage. All rights
reserved, especially in the case of the granting of a patent or registration of a
utility model or design
We have checked the content of this publication for compliance with the
described hardware and software. However, discrepancies cannot be excluded, with the result that we cannot guarantee total compliance. The information in this publication is, however, checked regularly, and any necessary
corrections are included in the following editions. We welcome any suggestions for improvement.
Siemens AG
Automation & Drives
SIMATIC Human Machine Interface
Postfach 4848, D-90327 Nürnberg
E Siemens AG 2001
Technical data subject to change.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Order no. 6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
For your notes
Preface
This manual
This equipment manual, conceived for the MP 270B Multi Panels,
OP 270 Operator Panels and TP 270 Touch Panels, is part of the SIMATIC HMI
documentation. In order to simplify its use, the term “operating unit” will
subsequently be used to refer to all the above units.
This manual provides operation, installation, configuration and system personnel
with information concerning installation, functionality, operation and technical
design of the new units.
Organization of the manual
The equipment manual is organized into the following chapters:
Chapter
Contents
1-2
Introduction and overview of features and functional scope of the
operating units
3-5
Commissioning and operation
6-7
Recipes and archives
8
9 - 12
13
System settings
Mechanical and electrical installation, dimensions, retrofitting of
options as well as maintenance and upkeep of the units
Information on updating the operating system
Appendix S Technical Data
S Interface Assignments
S HMI System Messages
S ESD Guidelines
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
i
Preface
Release 12/01
Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this manual:
Motor off
Text in the operating unit display is presented in this
typewriter font.
Tag
Symbolic names representing tag values on the screen are
presented in this italic typewriter font.
Screens
Functions available for selection are presented in this italic
font.
ESC
The names of keys and buttons are displayed in a different
font.
History
The various releases of this manual correspond to the following versions of the
ProTool CS configuration software:
Edition
12/01
Comment
First release of the Multi Panel MP 270B,
Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel
OP 270 Equipment Manual
ProTool Version
From V6.0
Trademarks
The following names are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG:
ii
S
HMI
S
MP 270
S
MP 270B
S
MP 370
S
ProAgent
S
ProTool
S
ProTool/Lite
S
ProTool/Pro
S
SIMATIC
S
SIMATIC HMI
S
SIMATIC Multi Panel
S
SIMATIC Multifunctional Platform
S
WinCC
S
WinCC Add-on
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Preface
Release 12/01
Other support
In case of technical queries, please contact the Siemens representatives in the
subsidiaries and branches responsible for your area.
Customer and Technical Support
Available round the clock, worldwide:
Nuremberg
Johnson City
Singapore
SIMATIC Hotline
Worldwide (Nuremberg)
Worldwide (Nuremberg)
Technical Support
Technical Support
(FreeContact)
(fee-based, only with SIMATIC
Card)
Local time: Mon.-Fri. 7:00 to 17:00
Local time: Mon.-Fri. 0:00 to 24:00
Telephone: +49 (180) 5050-222
Telephone: +49 (911) 895-7777
Fax:
+49 (180) 5050-223
Fax:
+49 (911) 895-7001
E-Mail:
techsupport@
ad.siemens.de
+1:00
GMT:
+01:00
GMT:
Europe / Africa (Nuremberg)
America (Johnson City)
Asia / Australia (Singapore)
Authorization
Technical Support and
Authorization
Technical Support and
Authorization
Local time: Mon.-Fri. 7:00 to 17:00
Local time: Mon.-Fri. 8:00 to 19:00
Local time: Mon.-Fri. 8:30 to 17:30
Telephone: +49 (911) 895-7200
Telephone: +1 423 461-2522
Telephone: +65 740-7000
Fax:
+49 (911) 895-7201
Fax:
+1 423 461-2289
Fax:
+65 740-7001
E-Mail:
authorization@
nbgm.siemens.de
+1:00
E-Mail:
simatic.hotline@
sea.siemens.com
–5:00
E-Mail:
simatic.hotline@
sae.siemens.com.sg
+8:00
GMT:
GMT:
GMT:
The languages spoken by the SIMATIC Hotlines are generally German and English, the Authorization Hotline is also
provided in French, Italian and Spanish.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
iii
Preface
Release 12/01
SIMATIC Customer Support Online Services
The SIMATIC Customer Support provides you with additional information about
SIMATIC products through online services:
S
General current information can be obtained
– in the Internet under http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic
S
Current product information and downloads which you may find useful are
available:
– in the Internet under http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic–cs and
– via the Bulletin Board System (BBS) in Nürnberg (SIMATIC Customer
Support Mailbox) under the number +49 (911) 895–7100
To dial the mailbox, use a modem with a capacity up to V.34 (28.8 kBaud)
whose parameters are set as follows:
– 8, N, 1, ANSI, or
– dial via ISDN (x.75, 64 kBit).
S
Your contact partner for Automation & Drives can be found in the contact
partner database
– in the Internet under
http://www3.ad.siemens.de/partner/search.asp
Abbreviations
The abbreviations used in this manual have the following meaning:
iv
AG (PLC)
Programmable Logic Controller
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
AS 511
Protocol of the PU interface to SIMATIC S5
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
CCFL
Cold Cathode Fluorescence Lamp
CF
Compact Flash
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CSV
Comma Separated Values
DC
Direct Current
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DNS
Domain Name Service
DP
Decentralized Periphery
DSN
Data Source Name
ESD
Electrostatically Sensitive Device
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
HMI
Human Machine Interface
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Preface
Release 12/01
IF
Interface
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LED
Light Emitting Diode
MP
Multi Panel
MPI
Multipoint Interface (SIMATIC S7)
OP
Operator Panel
PC
Personal Computer
PCL
Printer Control Language
PELV
Protected Extra Low Voltage
PU
Programming Unit
PPI
Point to Point Interface (SIMATIC S7)
QVGA
Quarter Video Graphics Array
RISC
Reduced Instruction Set Computer
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller
SRAM
Static Random Access Memory
STN
Super Twisted Nematic
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TFT
Thin Film Transistor
UNC
Universal Naming Convention
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply (USV)
USB
Universal Serial Bus
VGA
Video Graphics Array
WINS
Windows Internet Name Service
A list of all the specialist terms together with their explanations is provided in the
Glossary at the end of this guide.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
v
Preface
Release 12/01
SIMATIC HMI Documentation
Target groups
This manual is part of the SIMATIC HMI Documentation. The documentation is
aimed at the following target groups:
S
Beginners
S
Users
S
Configuration planners
S
Programmers
S
Service engineers
Documentation structure
The SIMATIC HMI Documentation includes the following components:
vi
S
User guides for
– configuration software
– runtime software
– communication between PLC and operating unit
S
Equipment manuals for the following operating units:
– SIMATIC PC
– MP (Multi Panel)
– OP (Operator Panel)
– TP (Touch Panel)
– TD (Text Display)
– PP (Pushbutton Panel)
S
Online help for the configuration software
S
Installation guides
S
Quick reference manuals
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Preface
Release 12/01
The following table provides an overview of the SIMATIC HMI Documentation
helpful for this manual.
Documentation
Target group
Contents
Getting Started
Beginners
These documents provide a step by step guide to the
configuration of
Quick Reference Manual
S a screen with various objects,
S changing screens,
S a message.
This documentation is available for
S
S
S
S
ProTool
Configuring
Windows-based Systems
Configuration
planners
text-based displays
graphics displays
Touch panels
Windows-based systems
Provides the following information for working with the
configuration software:
S information on installation,
S principles of the configuration,
S detailed description of objects and functions which
User’s Guide
can be configured.
This documentation applies to Windows-based
systems.
ProTool
Configuration
planners
Online Help
Contains the following information while working with
ProTool on the configuration computer:
S
S
S
S
Communication for
Windows-based Systems
Programmers
detailed instructions and examples,
reference information,
all information from the user guides.
Provides information on connecting Windows-based
systems to the following PLCs:
S
S
S
S
S
S
User’s Guide
context-sensitive help,
SIMATIC S5
SIMATIC S7
SIMATIC 505
SIMATIC WinAC
SIMOTION
PLCs from other manufacturors
This documentation describes
S the configuration and parameters necessary to
connect the units to the PLC and network,
S the user data areas which serve for data exchange
between the operating unit and PLC.
Note
The MP 270 Equipment Manual can be ordered as before from the nanufacture
using order no. 6AV6591-10B01-1AB0.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
vii
Preface
viii
Release 12/01
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Contents
1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
2
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
3
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3.1
Initial Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
Recommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start downloading manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start downloading automatically during normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
3-4
3-5
3.3
Operating Unit Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
3.4
Options for Download Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
3.5
Test the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
3.6
Download Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
3.7
Backup/Restore the Internal Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13
3.8
Backup/Restore on Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14
3.9
Backup/Restore Using ProSave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15
3.10
License Transfer (Authorization) Using ProSave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18
3.11
3.11.1
3.11.2
Load Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load application using ProSave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load applications using Active Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
3-20
3-22
3.12
ProSave Service Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
Operating the MP 270B Touch and TP 270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating touch elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enter numeric values for TP 270 6” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enter numeric values for MP 270B Touch and TP 270 10” . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enter alphanumeric values for TP 270 6” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enter alphanumeric values for MP 270B Touch and TP 270 10” . . . . . . .
Navigation using buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call help text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4-2
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-9
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
Operating MP 270B Key or OP 270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function keys/Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call help text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
4-12
4-14
4-17
4-19
4-21
4
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
ix
Contents
4.3
5
6
x
Release 12/01
Operating Using an External Keyboard/Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-22
Operating Screens and Screen Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5.1
Operating Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5.2
Logging On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5
5.3
Overview of Screen Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
5.4
Input Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10
5.5
Selection Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
5.6
Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14
5.7
Graphic Selection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16
5.8
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17
5.9
Status Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19
5.10
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21
5.11
5.11.1
5.11.2
5.11.3
5.11.4
5.11.5
5.11.6
5.11.7
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM_S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single message display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22
5-24
5-25
5-25
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-32
5.12
Bar Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-33
5.13
Trend Curve Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-34
5.14
Slider Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37
5.15
Analog Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-39
5.16
Digital/Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-40
5.17
5.17.1
5.17.2
Password List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export/Import password list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-41
5-42
5-43
5.18
Status/Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-45
5.19
SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-48
Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
Use of Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Flow for Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
6-3
6-4
6.3
Recipe Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Contents
Release 12/01
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
Editing Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recipe view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recipe screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions and PLC jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import/Export data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reaction on changing the recipe structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
6-11
6-19
6-23
6-24
6-27
7
Archives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
8
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
8.1
Set Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
8.2
Setting an Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
8.3.7
8.3.8
8.3.9
8.3.10
8.3.11
Windows CE Control Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set date/time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPS (only loadable as an option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4
8-6
8-10
8-11
8-11
8-11
8-11
8-11
8-12
8-12
8-13
8-14
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
Network Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the operating unit for network operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure network functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-15
8-16
8-17
8-18
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the MP 270B Key or OP 270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the MP 270B Touch and TP 270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
9-2
9-5
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.2.6
Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipotential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connect configuration computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connect PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connect printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connect external keyboard and mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-6
9-10
9-12
9-13
9-15
9-16
9-17
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1
10.1
MP 270B Touch, TP 270 10” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2
10.2
TP 270 6” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4
10.3
MP 270B Key, OP 270 10” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-6
10.4
OP 270 6” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-8
10.5
Function Key Labeling for MP 270B Key or OP 270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-9
9
10
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
xi
Contents
11
12
13
Release 12/01
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1
11.1
11.1.1
11.1.2
Hardware Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC card / CF card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2
11-2
11-4
11.2
11.2.1
Software Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6
11-6
Maintenance/Upkeep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1
12.1
12.1.1
12.1.2
Clean Screen/Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes on the touch panel units MP 270B Touch and TP 270 . . . . . . . . . .
12-1
12-1
12-2
12.2
Replacing the Optional Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-3
Operating System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1
Appendix
A
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
B
Interface Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
C
HMI System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
D
ESD Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
xii
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Introduction
1
New products in the middle performance range
The new MP 270B Multi Panels, TP 270 Touch Panels and OP 270 Operator
Panels extend the product range in the middle performance range sector.
These units are based on the innovative standard Microsoft Windows CE operating
system. They combine the robustness and speed of the dedicated hardware
solutions with the flexibility of the PC world.
The MP 270B represents the “Multifunctional Platform” product category and
distinguishes itself through the diversity of its potential use. This product category
is positioned in the product hierarchy between the optimized process and
application components, such as operator panels and PLCs on the one hand, and
industrial PCs on the other.
The TP 270 and OP 270 panels are categorized as lower grade, lower cost
variants but still provide a convincing functional scope.
As a result of the comprehensive product range on offer, users have the
opportunity of choosing the unit which best suits their particular needs. All the units
include the following advantages, amongst others:
S
High degrees of configuration efficiency,
S
Simulation of the configuration on the configuration computer (no PLC
required),
S
Clear display and easy operation of the process by means of a Windows-based
user interface,
S
Large selection of predefined screen objects during configuration,
S
Dynamic use of screen objects (e.g. moving objects),
S
Uncomplicated and quick handling of recipes and data records in recipe
screens and recipe views,
S
Archiving of messages, process values and login/logout procedures,
S
Creation of vector graphics using the SIMATIC ProTool CS configuration
software without an external graphics editor.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
1-1
Introduction
Release 12/01
S
Downloading:
– Automatic switchover to Download mode
– Transfer via MPI, PROFIBUS/DP, USB and Ethernet,
– Serial downloading,
– Transfer via TeleService.
S
Standard connections to SIMATIC S5/DP, SIMATIC S7 ad SIMATIC 505 as
well as to PLCs from other manufacturers.
Positioning in the SIMATIC HMI unit landscape
The operating units belong to the product category covering the middle
performance range. They fulfill the high demands made on performance, display
possibilities and price/performance ratio, and extend communication potential of
the office-world, for example. The requirements of customers for new possibilities,
e.g. in respect of extending data transfer functions, simpler operation and thus
increasing their acceptance when compared with CE units, were taken into
account during the development of the new units in the 270 series and have been
implemented.
In addition to the classic HMI applications (visualization using SIMATIC ProTool),
the Multi Panels also support the use of applications such as process diagnostics
(SIMATIC ProAgent/MP), UPS and soft PLC WinAC/MP V. 3.0.
A complete overview of the functional range of the individual units is provided
Chapter 2.
Area of use
The operating units enable operating statuses, current process data and faults
concerning a connected PLC to be graphically displayed and the relevant machine
or system to be easily monitored and operated.
The units have been conceived for easy machine operation and monitoring, and
provide a realistic graphical representation of the machine or system being
monitored. They can be used, for example, in machine and apparatus construction
sectors, in the printing and packing industries, in the automobile and electrical
industries and in the chemical and pharmaceutical industries.
The high degree of protection (IP65 front side) and non-implementation of hard
disks and fans ensure the units are also suitable for use in rough industrial
environments, directly on site on the respective machine.
Installation locations for the units include:
S
Panels/Consoles
S
19’’ cabinets/racks (only applies to MP 270B Key and OP 270 10”)
Connection options for external periphery units (keyboard, mouse and printer), e.g.
via a USB interface, and the possible use of CF and PC boards support
multifunctionality.
1-2
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Introduction
Release 12/01
The operating unit can be used to:
S
operate and monitor the process by means of the menu system. Setpoint
values or control element settings, for instance, can be modified by entering
values or activating configured function keys;
S
display processes, machines and systems on full-graphic, dynamic screens;
S
display and edit messages and process tags e.g. in output fields, bar graphs,
trend curves or status displays;
S
intervene directly in the running process by input.
Configuration using ProTool CS
Graphics, texts, user-defined functions and operating and display elements which
need to be represented on the operating units must first be created on a
configuration computer (PC or PU) using the SIMATIC ProTool CS configuration
software. In order to download the configuration to the operating units, the
configuration computer must be connected to it (refer to “Configuration phase” in
Figure 1-1). The connection can be established by a serial, an MPI/PROFIBUS-DP
network, a USB or an Ethernet interface or via a standard modem path.
Once the configuration has been successfully downloaded, connect the operating
unit to the PLC. The operating unit can then communicate with the PLC and
respond according to the information configured for running the program in the
PLC (refer to “Process running phase” in Figure 1-1).
PC/PU
Create project data
Save project data
Test the configuration
Simulate configuration
Configuration phase
Download project data
Operating unit
Connected to PLC
PLC
Process running phase
Figure 1-1
Configuration and process running phase
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
1-3
Introduction
Release 12/01
Overview: MP 270B, OP 270 10” and TP 270 10”
Features
Processor
Configuration
memory
Software
Interfaces
Color display
Membrane
keyboard
Acoustic
acknowledgement
Special
features
MP 270B
Key
Type
Capacity (max.)
OP 270 10”
TP 270 10”
64 bit RISC CPU
4 MByte
2 MByte
Operating system
Microsoft Windows CE
Standard HMI interfaces for
1 × RS 232
connection to PLC, PC/PU
1 × RS 232 (9-pin)
and printer
1 × RS 422/RS 485
S7 connection
MPI/PROFIBUS-DP
Further interfaces for network, 1 × Ethernet (10/100 Mbit) 1 × USB (12 Mbaud/Host)
external keyboard and mouse 1 × USB (12 Mbaud/Host)
Type
TFT LCD
TFT-LCD
CSTN-LCD CSTN-LCD
with touch
with touch
panel
panel
Active screen diagonal
10.4 ’’
Resolution (pixels)
640 × 480 (VGA)
Possible colors
256
Back-lighting
CCFL tube
Service life, approx. (h)
50,000
60,000
System keys with dedicated
38 (3 with
–
38 (3 with
–
functions
LEDs)
LEDs)
Function keys with
36 (28 with
–
36 (28 with
–
configurable functions
LEDs)
LEDs)
Those usable as softkeys
20 (12 with
–
20 (12 with
–
LEDs)
LEDs)
Function key labeling
with
–
with
–
labeling
labeling
strips
strips
In the case of touch operation
–
y
–
y
External memory extension
for recipes, archives,
messages, etc.:
S Slot for PC card
S Slot for CF card
1-4
MP 270B
Touch
y
y
–
–
y
y
y
y
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Introduction
Release 12/01
Overview: OP 270 6” and TP 270 6”
Features
OP 270 6”
TP 270 6”
Processor
Type
Configuration
memory
Capacity (max.)
Software
Operating system
Interfaces
Standard HMI interfaces for
connection to PLC, PC/PU and
printer
1 × RS 232
1 × RS 232 (9-pin)
1 × RS 422/RS 485
S7 connection
MPI/PROFIBUS-DP
Further interfaces for network,
external keyboard and mouse
Color display
Type
64 bit RISC CPU
2 MByte
Microsoft Windows CE
1 × USB (12 Mbaud/Host)
CSTN-LCD
CSTN-LCD with touch
panel
Active screen diagonal
5.7 ’’
Resolution (pixels)
320 x 240
Possible colors
256
Back-lighting
CCFL tube
Service life, approx. (h)
Membrane
keyboard
40,000
System keys with dedicated
functions
36 (3 with LEDs)
–
Function keys with configurable
functions
24 (18 with LEDs)
–
Those usable as softkeys
14 (8 with LEDs)
–
System-specific with
labelling strips
–
Function key labeling
Acoustic
acknowledgement
In the case of touch operation
Special
features
External memory extension for
recipes, archives, messages,
etc.:
S Slot for PC card
y
–
S Slot for CF card
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
–
y
1-5
Introduction
Release 12/01
Further information
Detailed information on the technical data of the operating units is provided in
Appendix A of this manual.
Detailed descriptions of the creation of configurations for the operating units and
the configuration software functions are provided in the ProTool Configuring
Windows-based Systems user’s guide and in the online help for ProTool CS.
Connection of the operating units to the PLC is described in the Communication for
Windows-based Systems user’s guide.
Any new information which could not be taken into account for printing in the
guides is provided in the Readme.wri file on the ProTool CD.
1-6
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
2
Functionality
The following table summarizes the range of functions provided by the operating unit. The
values specified are the maximum values which can be managed by the units. These values
are not accumulative, i.e. 4000 messages can be configured if no further objects are used.
However, it is not possible to define 4000 messages and 300 pictures each with 200 tags
simultaneously. The defined values are limited by the size of the configuration memory.
Function
Messages
Number
Display
View all pending messages
Message length
MP 270B MP 270B OP 270 10”/
Key
Touch
OP 270 6”
4,000
In message line/message window/
message display
Message page/Message display
70 characters (font-dependent) for message texts
configurable in ProTool,
255 character for message texts configurable in
Step7
Process values in message text
8
Color-coding of different
message states
y
Event messages
y
Alarm messages
y
S Type of display
S Acknowledge individual
TP 270 10”/
TP 270 6”
first/last, selectable
y
messages
S Acknowledge several alarm
16 acknowledgment groups
messages simultaneously
(group acknowledgement)
ALARM_S
Display S7 messages
Message logging
Output to printer
Volatile message
buffer
Message buffer capacity
y
y
512 message events
View messages
y
Delete
y
Print
y
Message events queued
simultaneously (max.)
S Event messages or
S Alarm messages/ALARM_S
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
500
250
2-1
Functionality
Release 12/01
Function
MP 270B MP 270B
Key
Touch
OP 270 10”/
OP 270 6”
File
Message buffer
archive
Memory location
Message
acquisition
Time of occurrence
Screens
Number
300
Fields per screen
200
Tags per screen
200
Complex elements per screen
(trends, bar graphs, etc.)
10
View
y
1)
Capacity
Date and time
Message events
Arrived, departed, acknowledged
y
Print (hardcopy)
Screen objects
Tags
Number
Limit value
monitoring
Inputs/outputs
TP 270 10”/
TP 270 6”
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Text
Graphics
Output field
Input field
Symbolic output field
Selection field
Date and time
Graphic display
Graphics list
Graphic box
Button
Status button
State view
Switches
Hidden button
Trend view
Bar
Message view
Single message display
Status/Force
Password list
Recipe display
Slider controls
Analog display
Digital/Analog clock
SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library
2,048
y
1) Limited by storage medium (storage media include PC cards, CF cards and network drive)
2-2
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Functionality
Release 12/01
Function
Screens
MP 270B MP 270B
Key
Touch
OP 270 10”/
OP 270 6”
TP 270 10”/
TP 270 6”
Operator prompting
S
S
S
S
S
S
Help text
y
y
y
y
Dynamic attributes
y
y
y
y
Call/Hide objects
y
y
y
y
Icons for softkeys
y
–
y
–
TAB sequence
y
–
y
–
LEDs in function keys
y
–
y
–
Fixed window
y
Conversion
functions
Inputs/outputs
y
Help text
Lines/characters
7/35 (font-dependent)
For messages
y
For screens
y
For screen objects
S
S
S
S
S
S
Archiving
Input field
y
y
y
y
Selection field
y
y
y
y
Button
y
–
y
–
Status button
y
–
y
–
Switches
y
–
y
–
Hidden button
y
–
y
–
Messages
y
Tags
y
Archive type
Cyclic/Sequence archive
No. of archives
20
Max. no. of tags which can be
archived
20
No. of sequence archives
40
Entries per archive
Memory location
Lists
Print functions
10,000
File (CSV)
Number
500
Graphic lists
400
Text lists
500
Hardcopy of the screen content,
also in color
y
Direct message logging
y
Shift report
y
Password
protection
Number of passwords
50
Recipes
Number
300
Data records per recipe 1)
500
Entries per recipe
1000
Password level
10 (0..9)
1) Limited by storage medium (storage media include PC cards, CF cards and network drive)
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
2-3
Functionality
Release 12/01
Function
MP 270B MP 270B
Key
Touch
OP 270 10”/
OP 270 6”
5
Online languages
Number of languages
PU functions
SIMATIC S5
y
(Status/Force)
SIMATIC S7
y
Screen settings
Blanking circuit
y
Brightness
y
y
Screen saver
Touch calibration
y
–
Contrast
y
–
Trigger functions cylically or once
y
VB Script
User-specific expansions of
functionality
y
Number of scripts
50
Number of lines per script
20
Number
6
Connections
Communication
y
–
Scheduler
2)
TP 270 10”/
TP 270 6”
SIMATIC S5
S AS5113)
S PROFIBUS-DP
y
SIMATIC S7-200
y
SIMATIC S7-300/400
y
y
SIMATIC 505
S NITP
S PROFIBUS-DP
y
SIMATIC WinAC
y
SIMOTION
y
y
Connection to PLCs from other manufacturers
Allen Bradley (PLC-5, SLC 500)
S DF1
S DH+
S DH485
y
y
y
LG Lucky Goldstar
S GLOFA GM
y
Modicon
S Modbus
y
Mitsubishi FX /
Mitsubishi Protocol 4
y
GE Fanuc
y
Omron Hostlink/Multilink
y
Telemecanique TSX
S Uni-Telway
y
2) With SIMATIC S7
3) Only via converter cable
2-4
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Commissioning
3
In this chapter
This chapter provides information on:
S
Initial start-up of the operating units (Page 3-3)
S
Recommissioning the operating units (Page 3-4)
S
Options for download mode (Page 3-7)
S
Testing the configuration on the operating unit (Page 3-10)
S
Uploading the configuration (Page 3-12)
S
Backup/Restore (Page 3-14)
S
License transfer ProSave (Page 3-18)
S
Load application (Page 3-20)
S
Service tool ProSave (Page 3-23)
Notice
In the case of the initial start-up, please observe the safety notes concerning
reverse poling protection on Page 9-9.
Notice
High frequency radiation, e.g. from mobile telephones, can cause exceptional operating situations.
Caution
Always terminate the runtime software before switching off the voltage supply in
order to prevent loss of data.
To terminate the runtime software, press the operating element assigned the
Exit_runtime function in the configuration. Wait until the operating unit start menu
(Loader) appears (Figure 3-1, Page 3-6) and then switch off the power supply.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
3-1
Commissioning
Release 12/01
Note
During the start-up phase, it is possible to connect an external keyboard or mouse
to the USB interface.
Further information
Further information on operating the operating units is provided in the following
chapters:
S
S
S
3-2
Basic operation of the touch panel units MP 270B Touch and TP 270:
Chapter 4.1
Basic operation of the keyboard units MP 270B Key and OP 270:
Chapter 4.2
Operating screens and screen objects: Chapter 5
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Commissioning
Release 12/01
3.1
Initial Startup
Action
When the operating unit is started up for the first time, no configuration has been
loaded on it. In order to download the necessary project data and the runtime
software from the configuration computer to the operating units, proceed as
follows, observing the sequence.
Step
1
Action
Connect the operating unit via the IF2 (serial), IF1B (MPI/PROFIBUS-DP), USB
or Ethernet interfaces to the configuration computer according to the download
type using a standard cable. Downloading is also possible via modem.
Default setting: Serial connection
2
Switch on the operating unit’s power supply.
3
When the unit is started up, it automatically switches from the Start menu to
download mode. An introductory application is also started when switching to
download mode. Exit from this by pressing the Cancel button to access the
Start menu and, from there, the Windows CE Control Panel.
The introductory application is automatically deleted after starting the unit for the
first time.
4
Check the settings defined for the interface in the download settings (serial, MPI,
USB or Ethernet) and adapt them as necessary (refer to Chapter 3.4).
Default setting: Serial connection
5
Close the Control Panel and activate download mode.
6
Start downloading the configuration on the configuration computer. Further
settings necessary on the configuration computer for the download operation are
provided in the ProTool Configuring Windows-based Systems user’s guide.
The configuration computer checks the connection to the operating unit. If the
connection is not available or defective, the corresponding error message
appears.
If downloading from the configuration computer is terminated as a result of a
compatibility conflict, the operating unit’s operating system must be replaced
(refer to Chapter 13).
If the connection is correct, the configuration data is downloaded to the operating
unit. Following successful downloading, the configuration is started and the unit
displays the start screen of the configuration that has just been loaded.
Set date/time
When the operating unit is disconnected from the power supply for a longer period
without the backup battery being used, the date and time must be updated.
Information on this is provided on Page 5-14.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
3-3
Commissioning
3.2
Release 12/01
Recommissioning
Purpose
During recommissioning, a configuration already loaded on the operating unit is
replaced by another. In this case, the project data is downloaded from the
configuration computer to the operating unit.
The following options are available to switch the operating unit to download mode:
S
S
S
3.2.1
Start downloading manually during the start-up phase of the operating unit
(Page 3-4)
Start downloading automatically during normal operation of the operating unit
(Page 3-5)
Start downloading via a correspondingly configured operating element while the
operating unit is in operation (Page 8-3)
Start downloading manually
Start downloading manually during the start-up phase of the operating unit:
Step
Action
1
Connect the operating unit via the IF2 (serial), IF1B (MPI/PROFIBUS-DP), USB
or Ethernet interfaces to the configuration computer according to the download
settings using a standard cable. Downloading is also possible via modem.
2
Switch on the operating unit’s power supply.
3
Check the settings defined for the interface in the download settings (serial, MPI,
USB or Ethernet) and adapt them as necessary (refer to Chapter 3.4).
4
Close the Control Panel and activate download mode.
5
Start downloading the configuration on the configuration computer.
The configuration computer checks the connection to the operating unit. If the
connection is not available or defective, the configuration computer issues the
corresponding error message.
If downloading from the configuration computer is terminated as a result of a
compatibility conflict, the operating unit’s operating system must be replaced
(refer to Chapter 13).
If the connection is correct, the new configuration is downloaded to the operating
unit. Following successful downloading, the configuration is started and the unit
displays the start screen of the configuration that has just been loaded.
3-4
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
3.2.2
Commissioning
Start downloading automatically during normal operation
Download settings
The operating unit can be switched to download mode automatically when in
normal operation as soon as downloading is started on the connected configuration
computer. This option is particularly recommended for the test phase involving a
new configuration project because the data is transferred without having to
intervene on the operating unit.
A condition for this is that the required connection is set in the Download option in
the Windows CE Control Panel and the corresponding Remote Control function is
activated.
A detailed description of the possible download settings is provided on Page 3-7.
Close modal dialogs
If the Remote Control option is active, the runtime is automatically shut down and
the operating unit switched to download mode. If dialogs are still open, the runtime
cannot be shut down when downloading has been started on the operating unit.
In such cases, close the dialog or interrupt downloading on the configuration
computer.
Recommendation
Following the start-up phase, switch the automatic download option off to prevent
inadvertently switching the operating unit to download mode in a system which is
running. To do this, deactivate the Remote Control option in the download settings
defined for the operating unit (Figure 3-2, Page 3-7).
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
3-5
Commissioning
3.3
Release 12/01
Operating Unit Start Menu
During the start-up phase, the Start menu (Loader) depicted below appears. When
the runtime has ended, the following appears:
Figure 3-1 Operating unit start menu (Loader)
Press the Transfer button to switch the operating unit to download mode.
Press the Start button to start the runtime automatically.
Press the Control Panel button to access the Windows CE Control Panel (see
Figure 6-2 on Page 6-3) in which various settings can be defined. The settings for
the download mode options can be defined here, for example.
Press the Taskbar button to activate the toolbar when the Start menu is open.
It is possible to protect the Start menu from unauthorized access by assigning a
password. If the password is subsequently not entered, only the Transfer and Start
buttons are available. This prevents incorrect operation and increases system or
machine security since settings cannot be modified.
3-6
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Commissioning
Release 12/01
3.4
Options for Download Mode
Overview
The following options can be set for download mode:
S
S
Automatic switching to download mode from normal operation when data
transfer is initiated from the connected configuration computer.
Download mode can be restricted to a specific connection type so that
downloading can only occur either via a serial connection, MPI/PROFIBUS-DP,
USB or Ethernet connection.
Note
Please note that the download settings defined during operation only take effect
after stopping and restarting the runtime software.
Download mode settings
Figure 3-2 Download settings configuration menu with Channel tab control
The Channel tab control in the Transfer Settings menu can be used to activate the
required communication channel and the respective Remote Control option. In
addition to the serial communication channel, a second channel can also be
selected to download data from the configuration computer to the operating unit.
Press the Advanced button to define the Address bus parameter setting and
Transmission Rate and Highest Station network parameter settings for
downloading via MPI or PROFIBUS-DP. The relevant driver must be set for
downloading via Ethernet.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
3-7
Commissioning
!
Release 12/01
Warning
When the option Remote Control is active, ensure that the operating unit is not
inadvertently switched to download mode from the configuration computer when in
normal operation.
Notice
Deactivate the Remote Control option when selecting the communication channel
if a serial printer is connected to the operating unit.
Notice
If no communication channel has been enabled using the Enable Channel option,
it is not possible to download a configuration from the configuration computer to
the operating unit.
Note
The bus parameters for the MPI transfer (e.g. MPI address, baud rate, etc.) are
read out of the configuration currently loaded on the operating unit.
The settings for MPI transfer can be modified. To do this, stop the runtime, modify
the settings and switch to download mode. When the runtime is subsequently started, the bus parameters are overwritten by values from the configuration.
!
Warning
In the case of Profibus-DP, modifications here may only be made for start up purposes.
Each modification of the settings for Profibus-DP, the operating units only set one
corresponding standard bus parameter set. In unfavorable conditions, this can
lead to faults on the DP bus.
In order to calculate the bus parameters exactly, the entire bus topology must be
known.
Correct definition of the bus parameters for runtime is automatically ensured by
the integrated operation of ProTool in STEP 7.
Note
Modifications must not be carried out when the runtime is in operation or the unit is
in download mode.
3-8
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Commissioning
Release 12/01
In addition to the setting options for download mode, the Directories tab control can
be used to specify the following paths (refer to Figure 3-3):
Figure 3-3 Download settings configuration menu with Directories tab control
S
Project File
The predefined storage location for the project file can be changed here.
The internal Flash memory or external Flash cards can be set for the operating
units. During the next downloading process, the configuration is stored in the
storage location specified.
S
Project Backup
The predefined storage location for the source file of your configuration can be
changed here. This file can be used for restoring (uploading) the configuration.
External Flash cards or network connections can be set for the operating unit.
Information on uploading is provided on Page 3-12.
S
Autostart application
Path
This defines the storage location for the ProTool runtime software. This is the
application with which the configuration runs under Windows CE.
Wait
It is possible to define the number of seconds the Start menu should remain on
screen before the runtime is started (1 s, 3 s, 5 s, 10 s or constantly). If no
runtime software is available, the unit automatically switches to download
mode.
Notice
Do not change the setting in the fields when working with ProTool. Otherwise, the
operating unit can no longer start the configuration.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
3-9
Commissioning
Release 12/01
Press the OK button or Enter key to confirm the settings currently defined for the
download options. Ensure that no buttons have been selected. The configuration
menu is closed and the Windows CE Control Panel is displayed.
Press the X button or ESC key to close the Configuration menu and call in the
Windows CE Control Panel. Any modifications made to the settings are rejected.
Note
If the unit is in download mode while changes are made to the download settings,
the settings only take effect after the download function is restarted. This can
occur when the Control Panel is selected via the Windows Start menu in order to
modify the downloading properties.
3.5
Test the Configuration
Conditions
In order to switch the operating unit between the operating modes OFFLINE and
ONLINE, the function Change_mode must be linked to an operating element in the
configuration.
Note
During the test phase, it is recommended to enable switching to download mode
from normal operation. Further information on this is provided on Page 3-5.
!
Warning
After the test phase, do not forget to deactivate the Remote Control option to prevent inadvertently switching to download mode from the configuration computer
when in normal operation.
Testing without a PLC connected (OFFLINE mode)
After setting the unit to OFFLINE mode, the individual functions of the
configuration can be tested on the operating unit without them being affected by
the PLC. PLC tags are not updated in OFFLINE mode.
Step
3-10
Action
1
Switch the operating unit to OFFLINE mode (refer to Page 8-3).
2
Check all the configured screens in respect of correct representation.
3
Check the screen hierarchy.
4
Check the input fields.
5
Test the function keys on the keyboard unit.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Commissioning
Release 12/01
Testing with a PLC connected (ONLINE mode)
When a PLC is connected, it is possible to test the communication between the
operating unit and PLC in ONLINE mode. This includes checking that the correct
data areas have been configured.
Step
Action
1
Connect the operating unit to the PLC.
2
Test all the items in the configuration for which communication with the PLC is
necessary e.g.:
S
S
S
S
messages,
print functions
automatic message logging
selecting screens etc.
Testing on the configuration computer
The material supplied with ProTool contains a simulation program which can be
used to test the configuration on the configuration computer without the necessity
of connecting a PLC or operating unit. Detailed information on this is provided in
the ProTool Configuring Windows-based Systems user’s guide and in the online
help to ProTool CS.
The simulation program can be started using the corresponding button in the
toolbar in ProTool
or via File → Test → Start Simulator.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
3-11
Commissioning
3.6
Release 12/01
Upload
Purpose
During downloading, only the run-capable configuration (*.fwd) which has been
generated is normally downloaded on the operating unit. If the original project file is
to be used for further development of the configuration or for fault analysis, it must
remain on the configuration computer.
Not only the generated configurations can be stored on the operating unit but also
the source file, so that it can be retrieved (uploaded) from the operating unit later, if
necessary.
Advantage
After uploading a configuration, it can be analyzed and modified even if the original
configuration computer cannot be accessed or the source file on it for the
configuration is no longer available.
Conditions
The following conditions must be fulfilled in order to retrieve the source file from the
run-capable project file:
S
Sufficient memory space must be available on the operating unit for the
additional source file.
S
The storage location for the source file must be set on the operating unit (refer
to Page 3-9). The storage location can be defined separately: Network path or
memory card
Note
The uploaded file is considerably larger than the run-capable configuration. The
internal Flash memory is not large enough to store this file.
S
Downloading of the current project file from the configuration computer to the
operating unit must be performed using the Enable upload option. This option
can be activated in ProTool CS via File → Download → Preferences.
What happens during download/upload?
In the case of downloading including transfer of the source file, the configuration is
compressed from the source format (*.pdb) and downloaded to the operating unit
as a *.pdz file. After uploading, the file is decompressed in the ProTool CS
configuration software.
Following uploading, the configuration must be given a new name on the
configuration computer.
3-12
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Commissioning
Release 12/01
Notice
S The uploaded, decompressed project file can only be opened with a
ProTool CS whose version number is greater or equal to that of the
configuration software with which the project was created.
S ProTool CS cannot check whether the source file on the operating unit matches
the configuration actually run on it. If downloading is performed at any time
without the Upload option being activated, it is possible that old project data is
on the operating unit which no longer matches the current project.
Instructions
Uploading a configuration from the operating unit:
Step
Action
1
Select the menu option File → Upload → Preferences in ProTool CS on the
configuration computer.
2
Use the Upload dialog to select the required connection type between the
operating unit and configuration computer and set the relevant connection
parameters.
3
Click on OK.
4
Switch the operating unit to download mode according to the setting in the
Transfer settings configuration menu.
5
Start the upload function using the menu item Upload → Start in ProTool.
6
Enter a new name or select an existing configuration to be overwritten and click
Save.
The uploaded configuration is saved and automatically opened in ProTool CS.
3.7
Backup/Restore the Internal Flash Memory
Purpose
The functions Backup and Restore provide the following options:
S
creating a copy of the entire configuration on a memory card.
S
creating a copy of the entire configuration on PC (ProSave).
S
copying selected objects, such as recipes and passwords, on PC (ProSave).
S
restoring the stored elements in the case of a fault.
S
updating the operating unit regardless of where it is in use without the need of a
configuration computer.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
3-13
Commissioning
3.8
Release 12/01
Backup/Restore on Memory Cards
Backup on CF card or Flash card
During a backup process, the operating system, application and data are copied
from the internal Flash memory to an external storage medium.
Proceed as follows to create a backup copy of the internal Flash memory:
Step
Action
1
Deactivate the write protection on the memory card, if set.
2
Depending on the target medium used, insert the memory card in the required
slot (Figure 11-1, Page 11-4).
3
Call in the Windows CE Control Panel (refer to Page 3-6) and, from
there, select the Backup/Restore option depicted on the right.
4
Start the Backup process by using the Backup button.
5
Confirm that any backup files which exist on the storage medium should be
completely deleted beforehand.
6
When the data has been completely downloaded, the operating unit issues a
message.
7
Remove the memory card.
8
Activate the write protection on the memory card, if available.
9
Label the memory card, e.g. with the date and version of the configuration
saved, and keep it in a safe place.
Note
Insert the memory card in the relevant expansion slot before starting the Backup/
Restore process:
S
S
PC card: Slot A (storage location \Storage Card\...)
(only applies to MP 270B)
CF card: Slot B (storage location \Storage Card2\...)
Information on the memory cards which can be used is provided on Page 11-4.
Notice
A plug-in memory card is used for Backup/Restore.
If both slots are occupied when Backup/Restore is initiated on the MP 270B, the
PC card (Slot A) is used first. In case of doubt, remove the memory card not to be
used from the operating unit.
3-14
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Commissioning
Release 12/01
Restore from CF card or Flash card
In the case of a restore process, the content of a Flash memory stored on an
external storage medium is reloaded into the internal Flash memory. Prior to this,
the operating unit’s internal Flash memory is completely cleared following
confirmation.
Proceed as follows to restore the content of the internal Flash memory:
Step
Action
1
For security reasons, activate the write protection on the memory card, if
available.
2
Depending on the target medium used, insert the memory card in the required
slot (Figure 11-1, Page 11-4).
3
Call in the Windows Control Panel and select the Backup/Restore option.
4
Start the restore process by clicking on the Restore button.
5
Confirm that the internal Flash memory and licenses should be completely
deleted.
6
After confirmation, the operating system is restarted and the operating unit is
automatically restarted. Finally, the remaining data is downloaded.
7
When the data has been completely downloaded, the operating unit issues a
message.
8
Remove the memory card.
9
Restart the operating unit.
Notice
If the restore process is interrupted due to a power failure, the operating system is
deleted. In this case, the operating system must be reloaded (refer to Chapter 13).
3.9
Backup/Restore Using ProSave
In order to save the entire configuration, or even specific parts such as recipes and
passwords, on a PC use the ProSave service tool. The advantage of ProSave is
that the Backup/Restore can be performed via the following transfer channels
without ProTool:
S
Serial
S
MPI / PROFIBUS-DP
S
Ethernet
S
USB
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
3-15
Commissioning
Release 12/01
Backup using stand-alone ProSave
During a backup process, the operating system, application and data are copied
from the internal Flash memory to a PC.
Creating a backup using ProSave as a stand-alone application:
Step
Action
1
Start ProSave on the PC using the Windows Start menu.
2
Use the General tab register to select the required device type and connection
type with corresponding connection parameters.
3
Use the Backup tab control to select the data to be saved (Recipes, Passwords
or Complete Backup).
4
Select the path in which the backup file (*.psb) should be saved.
5
Configure the operating unit according to the required transfer channel and
switch to download mode (Ch. 3.1 and Ch. 3.2).
6
Start the Backup process in ProSave by using the Start backup button.
7
A progress indicator appears during the data transfer. When the transfer is
successfully completed, a message appears briefly.
Backup using ProSave integrated in ProTool
Creating a backup using ProSave integrated in ProTool:
Step
Action
1
In ProTool, select File → Download → Preferences and use the Set download
window to define the connection type with the corresponding connection
parameters.
2
Open the Backup window in ProTool by selecting the menu items File →
Download → Backup.
3
Select the data to be saved (Recipes, Passwords or Complete Backup).
4
Select the path in which the backup file (*.psb) should be saved.
5
Configure the operating unit according to the required transfer channel and
switch to download mode (Ch. 3.1 and Ch. 3.2).
6
Start the Backup process by using the Start backup button.
7
A progress indicator appears during the data transfer. When the transfer is
successfully completed, a message appears briefly.
Restore using stand-alone ProSave
In the case of a restore process, the content of a Flash memory stored on the PC
is reloaded into the internal Flash memory on the operating unit. Prior to this, the
operating unit’s internal Flash memory is completely cleared.
3-16
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Commissioning
Release 12/01
Proceed as follows to restore the content of the internal Flash memory:
Step
Action
1
Start ProSave on the PC using the Windows Start menu.
2
Use the General tab register to select the required device type and connection
type with corresponding connection parameters.
3
Use the Restore tab register to select the path in which the file to be restored is
located.
4
The Archive Description displays the unit concerned and the type of backup data
contained in the file.
5
Configure the operating unit according to the required transfer channel and
switch to download mode (Ch. 3.1 and Ch. 3.2).
6
Start the Restore process in ProSave by using the Start restore button.
7
A progress indicator appears during the data transfer. When the transfer is
successfully completed, a message appears briefly.
Restore using ProSave integrated in ProTool
Proceed as follows to restore the content of the internal Flash memory:
Step
Action
1
In ProTool, select File → Download → Prefernces and use the Set download
window to define the connection type with the corresponding connection
parameters.
2
Open the Restore window in ProTool by selecting the menu items File →
Download → Restore.
3
The Archive Description displays the unit concerned and the type of backup data
contained in the file.
4
Configure the operating unit according to the required transfer channel and
switch to download mode (Ch. 3.1 and Ch. 3.2).
5
Start the restore process by clicking on the Start restore button.
6
A progress indicator appears during the data transfer. When the transfer is
successfully completed, a message appears briefly.
Note
Licenses on the operating unit are not stored with a backup.
Each restore on the operating unit deletes all the licenses on it permanently.
Therefore, save this data beforehand.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
3-17
Commissioning
3.10
Release 12/01
License Transfer (Authorization) Using ProSave
To protect the software, licenses supplied on a Siemens disk can be transferred to
the operating unit via a PC and enabled (e.g. ProAgent authorization).
License transfer using stand-alone ProSave
License transfer to the operating unit:
Step
Action
1
Start ProSave on the PC using the Windows Start menu.
2
Use the General tab register to select the required device type and connection
type with corresponding connection parameters.
3
Select the Authorize tab control.
4
Select the disk drive containing the license disk.
5
The licenses available on the disk are displayed under Selection.
6
Select the required license.
7
Configure the operating unit according to the required transfer channel and
switch to download mode (Ch. 3.1 and Ch. 3.2).
8
Press the button depicted to transfer them to the operating unit.
The selection appears in the Installed authorizations: field.
Deinstalling licenses from the operating unit:
Step
3-18
Action
1
Start ProSave on the PC using the Windows Start menu.
2
Use the General tab register to select the required device type and connection
type with corresponding connection parameters.
3
Select the Authorize tab control.
4
Configure the operating unit according to the required transfer channel and
switch to download mode (Ch. 3.1 and Ch. 3.2).
5
Press the Device Status button to display all the licenses installed on the operating
unit. These appear in the Installed authorizations: field.
6
Select the license to be deinstalled.
7
Press the button depicted to deinstall it from the operating unit.
The selected licenses appear under Selection.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Commissioning
Release 12/01
License transfer using ProSave integrated in ProTool
License transfer to the operating unit:
Step
Action
1
In ProTool, select File → Download → Preferences and use the Set download
window to define the connection type with the corresponding connection
parameters.
2
Open the Authorize window in ProTool by selecting the menu items File →
Download → Authorize.
3
Select the disk drive containing the license disk.
4
The licenses available on the disk are displayed under Selection.
5
Select the required license.
6
Configure the operating unit according to the required transfer channel and
switch to download mode (Ch. 3.1 and Ch. 3.2).
7
Press the button depicted to transfer them to the operating unit.
The selection appears in the Installed authorizations: field.
Deinstalling licenses from the operating unit:
Step
Action
1
In ProTool, select File → Download → Preferences and use the Set download
window to define the connection type with the corresponding connection
parameters.
2
Open the Authorize window in ProTool by selecting the menu items File →
Download → Authorize.
3
Configure the operating unit according to the required transfer channel and
switch to download mode (Ch. 3.1 and Ch. 3.2).
4
Press the Device Status button to display all the licenses installed on the operating
unit. These appear in the Installed authorizations: field.
5
Select the license to be deinstalled.
6
Press the button depicted to deinstall it from the operating unit.
The selected license appears under Selection.
Note
Uploading licenses can only be transferred to a disk which contained or still contains the same license.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
3-19
Commissioning
Release 12/01
3.11
Load Application
3.11.1
Load application using ProSave
Applications (e.g. drivers) specially developed for the operating unit can be
installed on the operating unit using ProSave.
The standard use of the driver supplied with ProSave is the provision of an
uninterruptible power supply and Internet Explorer for Multi Panels.
Load applications using stand-alone ProSave
Loading applications on the operating unit:
Step
Action
1
Start ProSave on the PC using the Windows Start menu.
2
Use the General tab register to select the required device type and connection
type with corresponding connection parameters.
3
Select the Options tab control.
4
Use Selection to select the path containing the required application.
5
The corresponding application is displayed under Available options:.
Select the required application.
6
Configure the operating unit according to the required transfer channel and
switch to download mode (Ch. 3.1 and Ch. 3.2).
7
Press the button depicted to transfer them to the operating unit.
The selection appears in the Installed options: field.
Deinstalling an application from the operating unit:
Step
3-20
Action
1
Start ProSave on the PC using the Windows Start menu.
2
Use the General tab register to select the required device type and connection
type with corresponding connection parameters.
3
Select the Options tab control.
4
Configure the operating unit according to the required transfer channel and
switch to download mode (Ch. 3.1 and Ch. 3.2).
5
Press the Device Status button to display all the applications installed on the operating unit. These appear in the Installed options: field.
6
Select the application to be deinstalled.
7
Press the button depicted to deinstall it from the operating unit.
The selected application appears under Available options:.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Commissioning
Release 12/01
Load applications using ProSave integrated in ProTool
Loading applications on the operating unit:
Step
Action
1
In ProTool, select File → Download → Preferences and use the Set download
window to define the connection type with the corresponding connection parameters.
2
Open the Options window in ProTool by selecting the menu items File →
Download → Options.
3
Use Selection to select the path containing the required application.
4
The corresponding application is displayed under Available options:. Select the
required application.
5
Configure the operating unit according to the required transfer channel and
switch to download mode (Ch. 3.1 and Ch. 3.2).
6
Press the button depicted to transfer them to the operating unit.
The selection appears in the Installed options: field.
Deinstalling an application from the operating unit:
Step
Action
1
In ProTool, select File → Download → Preferences and use the Set download
window to define the connection type with the corresponding connection parameters.
2
Open the Options window in ProTool by selecting the menu items File →
Download → Options.
3
Configure the operating unit according to the required transfer channel and
switch to download mode (Ch. 3.1 and Ch. 3.2).
4
Press the Device Status button to display all the licenses installed on the operating
unit. These appear in the Installed options: field.
5
Select the application to be deinstalled.
6
Press the button depicted to deinstall it from the operating unit.
The selected application appears under Available options:.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
3-21
Commissioning
3.11.2
Release 12/01
Load applications using Active Sync
Other applications can be loaded which can run under Windows CE with MIPS
CPUs and comply with the properties of the operating units. The installation and
deinstallation of external applications and drivers can be performed using the
Active Sync tool from Microsoft. The tool is not part of the material supplied by
Siemens and must be obtained from Microsoft, if necessary. At the time of print,
the tool could be obtained from the Microsoft homepage free of charge.
By selecting Start → Communication → PC Link in the Windows CE Start menu,
the connection to the host PC, containing Active Sync, is established. In addition,
data can be transferred between the PC and operating unit in both directions by
using the Internet Explorer view. Only a serial interface can be used for the
connection between PC and operating unit.
Note
It cannot be guaranteed that external applications run on the operating unit without
any problems if the operating unit properties are not complied with, e.g.
screen resolution.
When applications are loaded, they are initially stored in the DRAM file system.
The following memory locations are available for applications:
S
Internal Flash: 3 MB
S
DRAM file system: 2 MB
S
Working memory: 1 MB
Files created by applications are also normally stored in the DRAM file system.
The DRAM file system is deleted when the unit is switched off. Using the system
settings (OP Properties → Persistent Storage → Save Files, refer to Ch. 8.3.1),
however, it is possible to save the data currently available in the DRAM file system
in the Flash memory. When the unit is started up, the data saved is automatically
restored.
When an application is deinstalled, ensure that the files created by the application
are also deleted. In this case, delete the files in the DRAM file system first in the
normal Explorer and then backup the DRAM file system (OP Properties →
Persistent Storage → Save Files, refer to Ch. 8.3.1).
Note
By exchanging the operating system (Chapter 13) the initial operating unit configuration can be restored simply.
3-22
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Commissioning
Release 12/01
Note
Active Sync constantly uses the serial interface. If the interface is also required for
the ProTool download, the interface must first be enabled again via Active Sync.
3.12
ProSave Service Tool
The ProSave tool is supplied together with ProTool. All the functions are provided
which are necessary for the transfer of data between the configuration computer
and operating unit:
S
Installation and deinstallation of drivers, options and add-ons, i.e. applications
and drivers independent of ProTool, such as the UPS (Page 3-20, Page 8-13)
S
Data backup using Backup/Restore (Page 3-13)
S
License transfer (Page 3-18)
Integrated operation
ProSave is part of the material supplied with ProTool and can be automatically
loaded on the configuration computer with the ProTool installation. The entire
function range of ProSave is available within ProTool. In integrated operation, the
ProSave dialogs are called from the project. In this way, all the necessary
specifications (e.g. target device and download settings) are assumed from the
project.
Stand-alone operation
ProSave can also be installed as a stand-alone application. In this case, the
settings concerning the device and downloading must be defined in the ProSave
user interface and match the operating unit settings.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
3-23
Commissioning
3-24
Release 12/01
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operation
4
In this chapter
The MP 270B Key and OP 270 are operated by means of an integrated membrane
keyboard, the MP 270B Touch and TP 270 by means of buttons or a screen
keyboard. In addition, all models can be operated by an external keyboard or
mouse connected to the USB interface.
This chapter provides information on the general operating procedures of the
S
MP 270B Touch, TP 270 10” or TP 270 6” (Page 4-2)
S
MP 270B Key, OP 270 10” or OP 270 6” (Page 4-11)
S
with an external keyboard/mouse (Page 4-22)
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
4-1
Operation
4.1
Release 12/01
Operating the MP 270B Touch and TP 270
Overview
This section describes the general operating procedures for the MP 270B Touch,
TP 270 10” and TP 270 6”.
The MP 270B Touch or TP 270 screen is used to observe the operating status of
the machine or system being monitored and, at the same time, to intervene directly
in the process running simply by touching the relevant buttons and input fields
displayed.
Information regarding operation of screens and screen objects is provided in
Chapter 5.
4.1.1
Operating touch elements
Definition
Touch elements are contact-sensitive operating elements provided on the
MP 270B Touch or TP 270 screen, such as buttons, input fields and message
windows. Their operation is basically no different from pressing conventional keys.
Touch elements are operated by touching them lightly with a finger.
!
Caution
Be sure to touch only one point of the MP 270B Touch or TP 270 screen. Never
touch more than one touch element at a time. Otherwise, an action may be
unintentionally initiated.
Caution
Never use pointed or sharp instruments to operate the MP 270B Touch or TP 270
to prevent damage to the plastic surface of the touch screen.
Direct key
In the case of a DP connection, buttons can be configured as direct keys in order
to achieve fast keyboard operation. Fast key operation is a condition for Jogging
mode (Inching mode), for example.
PROFIBUS direct keys set bits directly from the MP 270B Touch or TP 270 in the
I/O area of a SIMATIC S7.
4-2
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operation
Release 12/01
Operation acknowledgement
As soon as the MP 270B Touch or TP 270 detects a touch element has been
touched, it responds with an optical and acoustic acknowledgement. An
acknowledgment is independent of communication with the PLC. It is not an
indication of the required action actually having been executed.
Acoustic acknowledgement
As soon as the MP 270B Touch or TP 270 detects a touch element has been
touched, it responds with an acoustic acknowledgement. The acoustic
acknowledgement can be modified or deactivated, as required (Page 8-11).
Optical acknowledgement
The type of visual acknowledgement is dependent on the operating element
touched:
S
Buttons
In the case of 3D-effect configurations, visual representation is distinguished
according to the statuses touched and untouched. The diagrams below
illustrate examples of the representation:
Touched
Untouched
The way in which the selected field appears on the screen can be configured
(line widths 1 - 10 for the focus and the color of the frame).
S
Hidden buttons
The focus for hidden buttons does not appear following selection (value for the
focus line width is 0 , default setting). If the value for the focus width is
changed, the dotted outline of the button changes to a line when touched. The
outlines remain visible until the focus is moved to another operating element.
S
Input fields
After touching an input field, the screen keyboard appears as the operation
acknowledgement.
Screen keyboard
In order to enter values, the MP 270B Touch or TP 270 automatically displays a
screen keyboard within the ProTool configuration after touching an input field,
for example. The screen keyboard is also displayed automatically if a password
needs to be entered in order to activate a password protected function (also refer
to Page 5-41). After completing the input, the screen keyboard is automatically
hidden.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
4-3
Operation
Release 12/01
Note
In the case of the TP 270 6”, the screen keyboard appears as a full screen to
simplify input for the operator.
The screen keyboard can be activated in the following ways:
S
The screen keyboard is always displayed during runtime as soon as the
operator selects an input field (default setting).
S
A button is configured with which the user can automatically activate or
deactivate the appearance of the screen keyboard as necessary. This is useful,
for example, when an external keyboard is connected to the operating unit
rendering the screen keyboard unnecessary.
Configure a button, call in the context menu and select the Properties dialog.
In the Functions tab control, select “click” as the event and assign this event to
the Use_On-Screen_Keyboard_On/Off function in the “Keyboard” category.
During runtime, the operator can use the button to activate or deactivate the
mechanism controlling the appearance of the screen keyboard.
S
The screen keyboard is activated via the corresponding icon in the toolbar (refer
to Chapter 3). The position of the screen keyboard can be defined in the Input
Panel option in the Windows CE Control Panel.
Note
Use the Start_On_Screen_Keyboard function to display the screen keyboard
permanently. The screen keyboard remains visible until it is explicitly closed by the
user. It can, thus, be used for input in other applications.
Depending on the input field configured, the screen keyboard button provides
buttons for purely numeric input or alphanumeric values.
External USB keyboard
An external USB keyboard can be connected to the USB interface (refer to
Chapter 4.3 on Page 4-22).
The dialog to activate the screen keyboard, defined by the user in ProTool CS,
continues to be offered for the MP 270B Key or OP 270, ProTool and the screen
keyboard can then be operated by a mouse connected to the USB interface.
4-4
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operation
Release 12/01
Operating screen objects using buttons
Screen objects which are assigned pre-defined buttons can also be operated by
buttons outside the screen object. A condition for this is that each function has
been linked to the respective button in the configuration.
These functions are complied in ProTool CS within the Keyboard action for screen
objects.
4.1.2
Enter numeric values for TP 270 6”
Numeric screen keyboard
In order to enter numeric and hexadecimal values, the TP 270 6” automatically
displays a numeric screen keyboard directly after touching an input field on the
touch screen. After completing the input, the screen keyboard is automatically
hidden.
The Help key is only active when a help text has been configured for that particular
input field.
Figure 4-1
Example of a screen keyboard for numeric input:
Note
The BSP key corresponds to the Backspace key.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
4-5
Operation
Release 12/01
Procedure
Numeric and hexadecimal values are entered character by character using the
buttons provided on the screen keyboard. Confirm the value entered by pressing
the Enter key or cancel the input by pressing ESC. The screen keyboard is closed
in both cases.
Note
When the keyboard is displayed, the lower and upper limit values are indicated,
when configured.
4.1.3
Enter numeric values for MP 270B Touch and TP 270 10”
Numeric screen keyboard
In order to enter numeric values, the MP 270B Touch or TP 270 10” automatically
displays a numeric screen keyboard directly after touching an input field on the
touch screen. After completing the input, the screen keyboard is automatically
hidden.
The Help key is only active when a help text has been configured for that particular
input field.
Figure 4-2
Example of a screen keyboard for numeric input:
Procedure
Numeric values are entered character by character using the buttons provided on
the screen keyboard. Invalid characters are rejected and an error message
appears. Confirm the value entered by pressing the Enter key or cancel the input
by pressing ESC. The screen keyboard is closed in both cases.
4-6
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operation
Release 12/01
Note
On entering the first character, a tooltip appears with the lower and upper limit
values related to the input window.
4.1.4
Enter alphanumeric values for TP 270 6”
Alphanumeric screen keyboard
In order to enter a character string, the TP 270 6” automatically displays a full
screen alphanumeric keyboard directly after touching an input field on the touch
screen. After completing the input, the screen keyboard is automatically hidden.
Keyboard levels
The full screen keyboard has an alphanumeric layout providing normal and Shift
levels. The Alt Gr level is not available.
The Help key is only active when a help text has been configured for that particular
input field.
An example of the keyboard’s normal level is illustrated:
Figure 4-3
Full screen, alphanumeric keyboard: Normal level (example)
Note
The BSP key corresponds to the Backspace key.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
4-7
Operation
Release 12/01
Procedure
Alphanumeric values are entered character by character using the buttons
provided on the full screen keyboard. Confirm the value entered by pressing the
Enter key or cancel the input by pressing ESC. The screen keyboard is closed in
both cases.
4.1.5
Enter alphanumeric values for MP 270B Touch and TP 270 10”
Alphanumeric screen keyboard
In order to enter character strings and numeric values in hexadecimal format, the
MP 270B Touch or TP 270 10” automatically displays an alphanumeric screen
keyboard directly after touching an input field on the touch screen. After completing
the input, the screen keyboard is automatically hidden.
Keyboard levels
The alphanumeric screen keyboard has several levels:
S
Normal level (Figure 4-3)
S
Shift level
S
Alt Gr level
S
Shift + Alt Gr level
The Alt Gr and Shift + Alt Gr levels serve to enter special characters.
The Help key is only active when a help text has been configured for that particular
input field.
An example of the keyboard’s normal level is illustrated:
Figure 4-4
4-8
Alphanumeric screen keyboard: Normal level (example)
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operation
Release 12/01
Procedure
Alphanumeric values are entered character by character using the buttons
provided on the screen keyboard. Confirm the value entered by pressing the Enter
key or cancel the input by pressing ESC. The screen keyboard is closed in both
cases.
Note
Press the button depicted twice (locking button) to activate the toolbar.
4.1.6
Navigation using buttons
It is possible to assign system key function to buttons:
S Page_Up
A button is assigned the Page_Up function.
S Page_Down
A button is assigned the Page_Down function.
S Go_to_Home
A button is assigned the Go_to_Home function.
S Go_to_End
A button is assigned the Go_to_End function.
These functions are compiled in ProTool CS within the Keyboard group.
4.1.7
Call help text
Purpose
Help texts consist of additional information and operating instructions provided by
the configuration planner concerning messages, screens and input fields. Help
text, concerning an input field for example, may provide information on permissible
value ranges (refer to Figure 4-5) or, in the case of an alarm message, information
related to the cause and its elimination.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
4-9
Operation
Release 12/01
Enter temperature setpoint for Tank_1
(Range 40...80 _C)
Figure 4-5
Help text for an input field (example)
Procedure
4-10
S
Help on messages
Touch the following button in the message window, on the message page, in
the message buffer or the message display
S
Help on input fields
Touch the Help key on the screen keyboard. This key only appears if a
configured help text exists.
S
Help on current screen
If the function Display Help Text has been assigned to a button, for example,
touch that button to call in the help text configured for the current screen.
S
Help on focussed screen object
Press the key combination ALT + H either on the screen keyboard or the USB
keyboard connected to call in the configured help text to the trend display which
has been focussed, for example.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operation
Release 12/01
4.2
Operating MP 270B Key or OP 270
Overview
The operating status of the machine or system to be monitored can be observed in
the MP 270B Key or OP 270 screen and the running process directly influenced by
using the integrated membrane keyboard.
This section describes the general operating procedures for the MP 270B Key and
OP 270.
Information regarding operation of screens and screen objects is provided in
Chapter 5.
MP 270B Key and OP 270 10” keypads
The keyboards of the MP 270B Key and OP 270 10” consist of two functional
blocks (Figure 4-6):
S
Function keys/Softkeys:
– Keys K1 to K16
– Keys F1 to F20
S
System keys:
– Alphanumeric keys
– Cursor keys
– Control keys
F2
F1
F3
F4
F6
F5
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
/
7
8
9
*
4
5
6
–
1
2
3
+
.
0
,
=
#
;
INS
DEL
A–Z
TAB
HELP
HOME
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
ESC
END
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
K10
K11
K12
K13
K14
K15
K16
Function keys/Softkeys
Figure 4-6
ACK
FN
SHIFT CTRL
ALT
ENTER
System keys
Assignment of the MP 270B and OP 270 10” keypads
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
4-11
Operation
Release 12/01
OP 270 6” keypad
The OP 270 6” keyboard consists of two functional blocks (Figure 4-7):
S
Function keys/Softkeys:
– Keys K1 to K10
– Keys F1 to F14
S
System keys:
– Alphanumeric keys
– Cursor keys
– Control keys
/
7
8
9
F2
*
4
5
6
F3
F4
–
1
2
3
F5
F6
.
0
,
A–Z
=
F1
F7
+
F8
HOME
INS
DEL
TAB
END
HELP
K1
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
K10
ESC
ACK
F
N
Function keys/Softkeys
Figure 4-7
4.2.1
SHIFT CTRL
ALT
ENTER
System keys
Arrangement of the OP 270 6” keypads
Function keys/Softkeys
Function keys with global function assignment
A function key with global function assignment always triggers the same action on
the MP 270B Key, OP 270 or in the PLC regardless of the screen currently open.
These actions could include:
S
S
S
Open screen
Display current alarm messages
Start screen printing (hardcopy)
All F and K keys can be assigned globally significant functions.
4-12
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Operation
Function keys with local function assignment (softkeys)
A function key with local function assignment (softkey) can trigger different actions
on the MP 270B Key, OP 270 or in the PLC according to the screen currently open
(local significance of current screen). An icon can be configured for each softkey
which can then be positioned at the edge of the screen.
The F keys can be assigned locally significant funtions.
!
Caution
If a function key is pressed directly following changing screens, the corresponding
function associated with the new screen can be triggered before the screen is
generated.
Note
A two-key operation is possible for the MP 270B Key and OP 270, i.e. two keys
can be pressed thus triggering two functions (refer to Communication for
Windows-based Systems) User’s Guide.
LED assignment
The Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) in the function keys can be controlled from the
PLC. A luminous or flashing LED can indicate to the operator which key to press
according to specific situations, for example.
In order to trigger LEDs, the corresponding data areas must be set up in the PLC
and specified as area pointers in the configuration. The assignment of the
individual LEDs to the bits in the database must be defined by the project engineer
when configuring the function keys. In this case, the bit number within the mapping
area is specified for each LED.
Detailed information on LED control is provided in the Communication for
Windows-based Systems user’s guide.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
4-13
Operation
4.2.2
Release 12/01
System keys
Control keys
The following control keys serve superordinated editing and control functions:
Shift (numeric/alphanumeric)
Backspace
Insert/Delete
Tabulator
Display help text
Escape (Terminate)
Acknowledge
Confirm entry
Alt key
Ctrl key
Shift (upper/lower case)
Shift (special characters)
Figure 4-8
Control keys
The system keys ACK, ESC, HELP and ENTER can also be assigned functions.
4-14
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operation
Release 12/01
Alphanumeric keys
Use the following alphanumeric keys to enter digits, letters and special characters.
The two marked keys are not available on the OP 270 6” keyboard.
Figure 4-9
Alphanumeric keys
Cursor keys
The cursor keys (Figure 4-10) are used to move the text cursor and to navigate in
screens and screen objects. The functions of the keys corresponds to the cursor
keys on a standard PC keyboard.
Figure 4-10
Cursor keys
The Home and End keys can also be assigned functions.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
4-15
Operation
Release 12/01
System key function overview
Table 4-1
Functions of the system keys
Key
Function
Purpose
Shift
(numeric/alphanumeric)
Switches the assignment of the input keys
from digits to letters.
S No LED lights up:
The numeric keyboard assignment is
active. Press the key once to switch to
alphanumeric assignment.
S An LED lights up:
The left or right-hand letter assignment
is activated.
Each time the key is pressed, the level
switches between the left-hand letter
assignment, right-hand letter assignment
and numeric keyboard assignment.
Delete character
S Delete individual character to the right
of the cursor.
Deletion is only possible when the digit
assignment is active. To insert characters,
press the Shift (digits/letters) key to
access alphanumeric assignment.
Cancel
S Deletes the character of a value
entered and resets the original value.
S Closes the active window.
Acknowledge
Acknowledges the currently displayed
alarm message or all messages in an
acknowledgment group (group
acknowledgement).
The LED lights up as long as
unacknowledged alarm messages are
queued.
Display help text
Opens a window with help text in respect
of the selected object (message, input
field). The LED indicates if help text exists
for the selected object.
Confirm input
S Accepts and ends the input
S Opens a selection field for symbolic
input
S Triggers the function on the selected
button
4-16
Tabulator
Moves to the next screen object available
for selection in the configured tabulation
sequence.
Delete character
Deletes the character to the left of the
cursor.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operation
Release 12/01
Table 4-1
Functions of the system keys, continued
Key
Function
Purpose
S Move to the next screen object
Move cursor
available for selection to the right, left,
above or below the current screen
object.
S Navigation in the screen object.
Scroll back
Scroll one page back.
Scroll forward
Scroll one page forward.
Shift
(upper/lower case)
Use in combination with other keys, e.g.
shift to capital letters.
Enter special characters
Use in combination with other keys: Enter
special characters.
Some keys have special characters,
imprinted in blue at the bottom left, e.g.
the percent character %. To enter the
character, press the key simultaneously
with the Shift key depicted to the left.
4.2.3
General control function
Use in combination with other keys, e.g.
navigation in trend curves
General control function
Use in combination with other keys, e.g.
Status/Force
Key combinations
General operation
Key combination
Function
Navigation
Moves to the previous screen object available for selection in
the configured tabulation sequence.
Positions the cursor within a screen object, e.g. in an input field.
Skip to the start, e.g. of a selection list.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
4-17
Operation
Release 12/01
Key combination
Function
Skip to the end, e.g. of a selection list.
Marks all the entries, e.g. in a selection list, from the current
cursor position to the start.
Marks all the entries, e.g. in a selection list, from the current
cursor position to the end.
Opens a selection field.
Screen settings
Increases the screen brightness.
Reduces the screen brightness.
Increases the screen contrast (OP 270 only).
Reduces the screen contrast (OP 270 only).
During the start-up phase
Switches the MP 270B Key or OP 270 to download mode.
As long as no data transfer is taking place, it is possible to exit
from download mode.
Other functions (e.g. in Explorer)
Accepts the selected value in the selection field without closing
it.
S Changes the active window.
S Switches between basic area and window.
Mark all
(left-hand letter assignment is active).
Display the properties of the marked element.
Navigation in the operating system
Key combination
Function
Opens the Start menu.
Open the Task Manager.
4-18
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operation
Release 12/01
Key combination
Function
Explorer:
Switch to superordinate level.
Switches the display area.
Activates the menu bar.
Dialogs:
Move to next field.
Move to previous field.
Opens the next tab control.1)
Opens the previous tab control.1)
Close the dialog without saving.
1) When the name of the tab control has the focus.
Operating screen objects using function keys
Screen objects assigned to buttons, e.g. message display, trend curve
representation, recipe view or status/force, can also operated by means of function
keys or softkeys. A condition for this is that each relevant function has been linked
to a function key or softkey in the configuration.
These functions are complied in ProTool CS within the Keyboard action for screen
objects.
4.2.4
Entering Values
Marking
On selecting an input field, the entire field content is marked by changing color.
After pressing a key (except a cursor key), the field content is deleted and the new
input displayed.
After selecting a field, press the SHIFT key and a cursor key simultaneously to
clear the marking on the field contents and enable the cursor to be moved freely
within the field.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
4-19
Operation
Release 12/01
Note
To enter the hexadecimal characters A...F, switch the input keys to alphanumeric
assignment.
Note
Limit values can be configured for numeric input fields. In this case, values
entered are only accepted when they lie within the limits configured. If an attempt
is made to enter a value which is outside the configured limits, it is rejected and
the original value automatically reinserted. In this case, the MP 270B Key or
OP 270 issues a system message.
Note
On entering the first character, a tooltip appears with the lower and upper limit
values related to the input window.
External USB keyboard and screen keyboard
An external USB keyboard can be connected to the USB interface (refer to
Chapter 4.3 on Page 4-22).
The dialog to activate the screen keyboard, defined by the user in ProTool CS,
continues to be offered for the MP 270B Key or OP 270, ProTool and the screen
keyboard can then be operated by a mouse connected to the USB interface.
Note
Use the Start_On_Screen_Keyboard function to display the screen keyboard
permanently. The screen keyboard remains visible until it is explicitly closed by the
user. It can, thus, be used for input in other applications.
4-20
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operation
Release 12/01
4.2.5
Call help text
Purpose
Help texts consist of additional information and operating instructions provided by
the configuration planner concerning messages, screens and operable screen
objects. Help text, concerning an input field for example, may provide information
on permissible value ranges (refer to Figure 4-11) or, in the case of an alarm
message, information related to the cause and its elimination.
Enter temperature setpoint for Tank_1
(Range 40...80 _C)
Figure 4-11
Help text for an input field (example)
Procedure
Proceed as follows in order to call in the configured help text e.g. for an input field:
Step
1 Select input field
2 Call in the help text
Procedure
(e.g.)
The input field is marked.
The LED in the key lights up, indicating that
help text is available. Press the key to call in
the help text.
The configured help text is displayed in the
language currently set on the operating unit.
If help text is also configured for the current
picture, it is displayed after pressing the key
again.
3 Close help window
The help window is closed.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
4-21
Operation
4.3
Release 12/01
Operating Using an External Keyboard/Mouse
Overview
An external keyboard or mouse can be connected to the USB interface on the
operating unit. Connection and disconnection is possible during normal operation
of the operating unit (”hot plug in/out”).
Operation using an external keyboard/mouse is particularly recommended in the
start-up and set-up phases.
Operation
Operation of the operating unit via a mouse is only a little different from operation
using the touch screen. After connecting a mouse, the mouse pointer appears on
the screen
.
When the mouse pointer is positioned on an operable button, for example, the
.
mouse pointer symbol changes
!
Caution
When using the MP 270B Key or OP 270, do not use the integrated membrane
keyboard and external USB keyboard simultaneously. Otherwise, an action may
be unintentionally initiated.
Notice
USB mouse:
S Use a standard mouse.
USB keyboard:
S Use a standard keyboard with a USA/International keyboard layout.
S Operation of the configured function keys is not possible via the external
keyboard.
Commercially available USB units do not normally fulfill higher industrial demands
with regard to resistance to interference which can cause negative effects on the
unit.
4-22
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
5
In this chapter
Operation of the visualization processes on the operating unit is dependent on the
configuration created with the ProTool CS configuration software. This chapter
provides general information on screens and on operating predefined screen
objects for touch panels and keyboard units.
Information on the general operation procedures of the MP 270B Touch and
TP 270 touch panels is provided in Chapter 4.1. Information on the general
operating procedures of the MP 270B Key and OP 270 unit is provided in
Chapter 4.2.
5.1
Operating Screens
What is a screen?
Screens visualize the progress of processes and display specified process values.
A screen contains logically related process data which the operating unit can both
display and modify by operating the individual values.
Screens display the current process status in the form of numeric values, bar
graphs or trend curves for example. Dynamic screen objects enable, for instance,
the current position of a production process to be tracked on the operating unit.
Screen partitions
A screen is basically composed of static and dynamic sections. The terms “static”
and “dynamic” do not refer to the possibility of dynamically positioning screen
partitions but to the connection to the PLC.
Static partitions, e.g. text and graphics, are not updated by the PLC. Dynamic
partitions, e.g. input and output fields, trend curves and bars, are linked to the PLC
and display current values constantly read in from the PLC memory. Their
connection to the PLC is established by means of tags.
A summary of all the screen objects which a ProTool configuration may contain for
an operating unit is provided from Page 5-6.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-1
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
The display area of a screen can be divided into various areas. These areas are
either moveable (message area and message indicator) or fixed (fixed window,
icons for function keys).
Fixed window
The fixed window is an area at the top of the screen. The height of the fixed
window can be configured. Since the content of the fixed window is independent of
the screen currently displayed, it is especially suited for displaying important
process magnitudes or date and time.
An operating element configured in the fixed window is available in every screen.
In the case of the touch panels MP 270B Touch, TP 270 10” and TP 270 6”, a
button in a fixed window may represent a function key which has a global effect.
Icons for keyboard units MP 270B and OP 270
Icons are graphics of a fixed size located at the bottom and sides of the keyboard
unit screen. They are defined during configuration and clearly indicate the
screen-specific functions of the softkeys in graphic form.
By pressing the respective softkey F1 to F20 with the MP 270B Key and
OP 270 10” or F1 to F14 with the OP 270 6”, the function symbolized by the icon is
triggered on the operating unit or in the PLC.
Message indicator
The message indicator is a configurable graphical symbol which is
displayed on the screen when at least one alarm message is present
or needs to be acknowledged on the operating unit.
The indicator continues to blink as long as unacknowledged
messages are present.
The number (in this case 3) represents the number of alarm
messages present.
The message indicator can be operated on the MP 270B Touch and TP 270.
Operate message indicator on MP 270B Touch and TP 270 touch panels:
The response of the message indicator is dependent on whether or not alarm
messages are present on the operating unit which still have to be acknowledged at
the moment the indicator is touched.
5-2
S
Alarm messages to be acknowledges (message indicator flashing):
The alarm message window opens on touching the message indicator
(Page 5-26).
S
No alarm messages to be acknowledged:
The alarm message window opens on touching the message indicator
(Page 5-28).
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Use the button illustrated to close the alarm window for touch panels in
order to operate screens. The alarm message window can be opened again
by touching the message indicator.
In the case of keyboard units, the messages must be acknowledged by
pressing the ACK button.
Message window
System messages
The operating unit displays internal operating statuses in the system message
window. System messages indicate, for example, incorrect operations or
communication faults. A summary of some of the most important system
messages and explanations on how to eliminate the causes are provided in
Appendix C of this manual.
Proceed as follows to close the system message window:
S MP 270B Key / OP 270:
Press the ESC key.
S MP 270B Touch / TP 270:
Press the button illustrated.
Event messages
The operating unit uses the event message window to display operating statuses
and faults concerning the machine or system connected to the PLC. The message
text can contain current measured data. The position of the window can be
configured.
Alarm messages
The operating unit uses the alarm message window to display faults concerning
the machine or system connected to the PLC. The position of the window can be
configured.
Since alarm messages indicate abnormal operating statuses, they must be
acknowledged. Proceed as follows to acknowledge alarm messages:
S MP 270B Key / OP 270:
Press the ACK key.
S MP 270B Touch / TP 270:
Press the button illustrated.
More options for displaying messages are described from Page 5-22. Detailed
information regarding the message window is provided on Page 5-25.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-3
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Changing active window
Several windows can be opened simultaneously when the operating unit is running
in normal operation. Proceed as follows to change the active window:
S MP 270B Key / OP 270:
In order to operate a window, use the key combination depicted
on the right to move between the basic screen area and the
windows. Each time the combination is pressed, the cursor moves
to the next window.
S MP 270B Touch / TP 270:
A window becomes active after touching it.
The window in which the cursor is located is the active window. Input/Operations
are possible in the active window. It is not possible to change to a window which
contains no operable objects.
Select screen
The operating unit can be used to view, edit and print screens. The relevant screen
must have been selected beforehand. There are several ways in which to select a
screen:
S
Function key/Button
Pressing a function key or button opens the corresponding screen defined in
the configuration.
S
Input field
Enter the corresponding number of the screen to be viewed in the input field.
S
Edit messages
When configured, pressing the Edit button calls in the message assigned to the
screen in the message window or message display, for example.
Note on configuration
Press the key with which the screen should be selected. Select the
Select_screen_permanent function and enter a name for the screen under the
Screen Name parameter. In the Field Number box, enter the Tab key sequence
number of the field in which cursor should be located following a change of
screens. As soon as the key is subsequently pressed, the function is triggered and
the content of the Screen Name and Field Number parameters evaluated. The
corresponding screen is displayed on the operating unit.
5-4
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
5.2
Logging On and Off
Purpose
Operable screen objects, such as input fields and buttons, can be assigned
passwords during configuration to prevent them being modified by unauthorized
personnel. Important parameters and settings can then only be modified by
authorized personnel.
Information on the Password List screen object is provided on Page 5-41.
Login
In order to access password protected operating elements, it is necessary to log in
on the operating unit. In this case, the function Logon_User must be linked with an
input field, for example, in the configuration. The user then has access to all the
protected operating elements on the operating unit for which the password is valid
until logging off.
When correspondingly configured, it is also possible to log on via an input field for
confidential password entry (Page 5-10). The character string entered is
represented by placeholders (*).
If an element is operated which is protected by a password, the login window
automatically appears.
Logoff
In order to rule out operation by unauthorized personnel, the login should not
remain active on the operating unit for too long a period of time. The following
options are available with which to log off from the operating unit:
S
Configured logout time expires
If the operating unit is not operated by the user within the configured period
(logout time), the user is automatically logged off.
S
Log off
If the configuration links the function Logoff_User with an operating element,
the element can be used log off from the operating unit.
Note
It is possible to log off by entering an incorrect password.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-5
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
5.3
Release 12/01
Overview of Screen Objects
A summary of the screen objects which an operating unit configuration may
contain is provided in the following table.
Screen object
Text
Use/Description
Texts are used in the configuration to label display and
operating elements, for example. Texts cannot be
modified.
The importance of different texts within a screen can
be distinguished by assigning different fonts and
formats.
Texts can be configured to cover several lines and in
different languages.
Graphics
Graphics can be used in the configuration, for
example, to display the system or as explanatory
symbols for display and operating elements which
have been configured.
Output field
An output field displays current values from the PLC in
numeric or alphanumeric form.
Input field
The input field is used to enter values which are then
transferred to the PLC. The values can be in numeric
or alphanumeric form. Entries which lie outside the
specified value range are rejected according to the limit
values which have been configured.
(Page 5-10)
The input can be protected by means of a password.
Symbolic output field
A symbolic output field displays current values from the
PLC as plain text.
Example:
Instead of the values 0 and 1 the symbolic output field
displays the texts Motor OFF and Motor ON.
Selection field
(Page 5-12)
Date/Time
(Page 5-14)
Graphic display
Values are not entered in the selection field character
by character but are selected from a text list. This
enables, for example, a motor to be switched on and
off by means of the entries ON and OFF.
This screen object is used to display and enter the
calendar date and time. The way in which the date and
time are displayed depends on the language set on the
operating unit.
The graphic display enables the dynamic positioning of
graphics from external graphic programs in the project.
Example:
Instead of using a numeric value indicator, the fill level
of a tank can be visualized by a dynamic graphic.
5-6
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Screen object
Graphics list
Use/Description
A graphic list displays current values from the PLC in
the form of a graphic. It assigns a graphic to each tag
value. The value of the tag during runtime determines
which graphic is selected from the list and displayed on
the operating unit.
Example:
Instead of the values 0 and 1, the graphics list displays
graphical representations for open and closed valves.
Graphic box
A graphic box enables the selection of a graphic by
selecting an entry from a graphics list.
Example:
Using a graphic selection list it is possible to design the
user interface as language independent, for example.
Vector graphics
The following vector graphic objects can be configured:
S
S
S
S
S
Line
Rectangle/Square
Rounded rectangle/square
Circle/Ellipse
Polyline/Polygon
These objects are combined to form vector graphics
with simple, basic geometrical shapes in your
configuration. The type, color and width of the lines
and their transparency, color filling, rounding radius,
etc. can be configured as desired.
Button
(Page 5-17)
A button is a virtual key on the operating unit screen
that can be assigned one or more functions,
depending on the configuration.
After pressing the button, the functions configured for
the event press are triggered. On releasing the button,
the functions configured for the event release are
triggered.
Status button
(Page 5-19)
A Status button is a display and operating element
which has one of two states: Touched and Untouched.
The states can be indicated by means of text or
graphics.
The Status button can be configured to be locking
(switch function) or non-locking (keying function).
State view
The state view can be used to configure a warning
display or to indicate the status of a unit which cannot
be viewed from the operating unit (e.g. a motor).
The response of the State view can be configured.
Switch
(Page 5-21)
A switch serves to enter and display a binary status. It
can only be switched on or off.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-7
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Screen object
Invisible button
Release 12/01
Use/Description
An invisible button is a transparent button that is not
displayed on the operating unit. If invisible buttons are
located over graphics, for example, it is possible to
operate part of the graphic, e.g. a motor or valve.
(Page 5-17)
After pressing the button, the functions configured for
the event press are triggered. On releasing the button,
the functions configured for the event release are
triggered.
Bar
Bars represent values from the PLC as rectangular
areas. The operating unit thus provides a clear
indication of how far the current value is from the limit
values, or if a setpoint value has been reached, at a
glance. Bars are often used to represent fill levels or
workpiece numbers.
(Page 5-33)
Direction, scaling, bar and background color and
labeling the Y-axis can be configured as required. In
order to identify limit values, limit value lines can be
called in.
Trend view
A trend view provides a particularly clear
representation of process data when displayed as a
continual progression.
(Page 5-34)
Several different trend curves can be displayed
simultaneously in the trend view, e.g. current and
archived trend curves.
Slider control
Use a slider control to enter and display numeric
values in analog form. To enter values, move the slider
to the required position.
(Page 5-37)
When used as a display element, the value is
represented by the position of the slider.
Message view
Special filter criteria are configured in the message
view for displaying the volatile message buffer and/or
message archive.
(Page 5-31)
Single message view
(Page 5-32)
Status/Force
(Page 5-45)
A single message display can provide a subset of the
functionality of a message display. It can be used, for
example, to simply realize a message line in a screen.
By implementing Status/Force, the operating unit can
be used to access the connected PLC (SIMATIC S5
and SIMATIC S7) in order to read and write values
directly. PLC operands can be monitored and modified
without having to connect an additional programming
unit or PC to the PLC.
This facility is of special use during the testing and
commissioning phases of the configuration.
Password list
(Page 5-41)
Recipe view
(Page 6-11)
Analog display
(Page 5-39)
5-8
Using the password list it is possible to view, enter and
modify passwords with user assignment on the
operating unit.
A recipe view can be used to create, save and transfer
data records on the operating unit.
An analog display indicates numeric values by means
of a pointer instrument.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Screen object
Digital/Analog clock
(Page 5-40)
SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library
(Page 5-40)
Use/Description
A digital/analog clock enables the system time to be
displayed either as digits or as a traditional clock with
hands.
The SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library, containing
numerous graphics from production and techniques,
enables graphics to be created in the project in both
abundance and realistically.
They include:
valves, motors, tank containers, conveyor belts,
cooling systems and heating equipment as well as ISA
symbols.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-9
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
5.4
Release 12/01
Input Field
Purpose
Numeric or alphanumeric values are entered character by character in an input
field. A numeric value is a number, e.g. 80 as a setpoint value for a temperature.
An alphanumeric value can contain text and digits e.g. Valve_12.
Limit value check
If limit values are configured for the input field tags, the values entered are only
accepted when they are within the configured limits. If an attempt is made to enter
a value which is outside the configured limits, it is rejected and the original value
automatically reinserted. In this case, the operating unit issues a system message.
Display
Input fields can be configured differently according to their purpose, e.g.:
5-10
S
Numeric input field
to enter numeric values in decimal, hexadecimal or binary format.
S
Alphanumeric input field
to enter character strings. It is only possible to enter ASCII characters. They
are dependent on the language selected.
S
Input field for date and time
to enter the calendar date and time. The format is dependent on the language
currently set on the operating unit. The figure below illustrates examples of
input fields for date and time in US English language format.
S
Input field for confidential password entry
to enter passwords confidentially. The character string entered is represented
by placeholders (*). The figure below illustrates an example.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Operation
Proceed as follows to operate an input field:
S MP 270B Key / OP 270:
– Select the input field required. The field content
changes color when the field is accessed.
– Use the cursor keys to position the cursor and then
enter the required value.
– Confirm the entry
(e.g.)
or
– Discard the entry
Also refer to Page 4-19.
S MP 270B Touch / TP 270:
– Touch the input field on the touch screen of the MP 270B Touch or TP 270.
The screen keyboard automatically appears. Alternatively, activate the
screen keyboard via the Start_On_Screen_Keyboard function.
– Enter the required value.
– Confirm the entry
or
– Discard the entry
Also refer to Page 4-5.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-11
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
5.5
Release 12/01
Selection Field
Purpose
Values are entered in a selection field not character–by–character but are selected
from a list provided (Figure 5-1).
Figure 5-1
Selection field in opened state (example)
Operation on the MP 270B Key or OP 270
Operating a selection field on the MP 270B Key or OP 270:
Step
1 Select the selection
field
Procedure
(e.g.)
2 Open selection list
The selection field is marked.
The selection list opens up.
3 Select entry
Moves cursor line by line.
,
4 Apply selection
The selected entry becomes valid.
The selection field is closed.
or
Cancel selection
The original value is reapplied. The selection
field is closed.
Note
After pressing an alphanumeric key, the first list entry which begins with that letter
appears.
5-12
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Operation on the MP 270B Touch or TP 270
Touch the selection field on the touch screen of the MP 270B Touch or TP 270. In
this case, the selection list opens up immediately. After selecting an element from
the list, the selection list is closed and the selected text appears in the list box.
If the touch screen is touched outside the pulled down selection list, the list is
closed and the entry with the focus appears in the selection field.
!
Caution
When released, the focussed list entry is immediately accepted. Therefore,
continue to press the screen with your finger while sliding it to the required entry.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-13
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
5.6
Release 12/01
Date/Time
Purpose
The screen object Date/Time displays the current values for the time and/or date.
The time can be modified online if the corresponding feature is configured.
The calendar data and time values are synchronized with the operating system
values or are read from the PLC. The operating unit accesses these values, for
example, to assign time stamps to message events.
Notice
Without the optionally available backup battery (Chapter 11) the system time is
stored for approx. 3 days 1). If the unit is disconnected from the power supply for a
longer period, the date and time must be updated following recommissioning.
Format
The format of the date and time depends on the language currently set. It
corresponds to the standard international conventions:
Table 5-1
Examples of language-dependent formats for Date/Time
Language
Example
Date
long
Time
short
German
Samstag, 25. November 2000
25.11.00
12:59:32
English (USA)
Saturday, November 25, 2000
11/25/00
12:59:32 PM
French
samedi 25 novembre 2000
25/11/00
12:59:32
Italian
sabato 25 novembre 2000
25/11/00
12.59.32
Spanish
(traditional)
sábado 25 de novembre de 2000 25/11/00
12:59:32
The format set for Date and Time can be modified using the Regional
Settings option in the Windows CE Control Panel. To do so, select the icon
depicted on the right. Information on opening the Windows CE Control
Panels is provided on Page 8-4.
Notice
When entering the date and time, ensure that the two values are separated by a
space.
1) The unit must have been in operation for approx. 6–8 hours, without any interruptions,
beforehand.
5-14
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Notice
If the operating unit does not support the language specified in the configuration,
the display of Date and Time will assume the format of the language currently set
in the Regional Settings option under Format.
Synchronizing date/time with the PLC
The date and time in the operating unit and PLC can be synchronized if this feature
is defined in the configuration and PLC program. To do this, the PLC jobs 14 (Set
Time) and 15 (Set Date) are provided. Use PLC jobs 40 and 41 to transfer the date
and time from the operating unit to the PLC.
Further information on this is available in the Communication for Windows-based
Systems user’s guide.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-15
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
5.7
Release 12/01
Graphic Box
Purpose
The graphic box is an input field for symbolic values. A graphic can be selected by
selecting an entry in the graphic list.
Operation on the MP 270B Key or OP 270
Operating a graphic box on the MP 270B Key or OP 270:
Step
1 Select graphic box
Procedure
(e.g.)
2 Open the graphic
selection list
The graphic box is marked.
The graphic selection list opens up.
3 Select entry
Moves cursor line by line.
,
,
4 Apply selection
The selected entry becomes valid.
or
Cancel selection
The original value is reapplied.
Operation on the MP 270B Touch or TP 270
Touch the graphic box on the touch screen of the MP 270B Touch or TP 270.
Selection mode is activated. Scroll through the graphic selection list using the
scroll bar (vertical or horizontal). Click on the required graphic to select it. The
graphic is transferred.
By clicking outside the graphic frame, the graphic selection is rejected.
5-16
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
5.8
Button
Purpose
A button is a virtual key located on the operating unit screen. Functions which have
been assigned to buttons can be triggered, for example, by the following,
configurable events:
S
S
S
Clicking
Pressing
Releasing
S
Labeling
Buttons can be labeled statically or dynamically. In the case of dynamic
labeling, the text or graphic on the button changes during runtime according to
the value of a configured tag.
S
Operation acknowledgement
As soon as the operating element detects a valid operation, it responds with a
visual acknowledgement. The acknowledgement, however, does not infer that
the required action is actually being executed.
Display
Figure 5-2 illustrates examples of buttons which are pressed (right) and not
pressed (left).
Figure 5-2
Example of a button
Hidden buttons
Hidden buttons are transparent buttons which may lie over graphics, for example.
This enables plant parts which are graphically displayed on the operating unit to be
operated easily (e.g. a motor or valve). If a hidden button is selected, its contour
becomes visible as long as the button remains selected. The contour enables the
user to detect the operable area of the button. The contour is defined by the
configuration.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-17
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Operation
Proceed as follows to operate a button:
S MP 270B Key / OP 270:
– Select the required button, e.g. using a cursor key.
– Press either the Enter key or the Spacebar.
(e.g.)
or
S MP 270B Touch / TP 270:
Touch the button on the touch screen.
Note
Click
In the case of a button, a function is triggered when the pressed button is released
within the contours of the button.
If the button is pressed using the mouse button or finger (when using touch
panels) but moved outside the contour before releasing, the operating unit does
not interpret the action as a click event. The action is not executed.
Release
In the case of a button, a function is triggered when the pressed button is
released.
If the button is pressed using the mouse button or finger (when using touch
panels) but moved outside, the function is triggered when the function is released.
Press
In the case of a button, a function is triggered as soon as the button is pressed.
5-18
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
5.9
Status Button
Purpose
The Status button is an operating and display element with the two states Pressed
and Released. Status buttons can indicate the status of units which cannot be
seen by the operator (e.g. a motor). At the same time, it is also possible to change
the status of the device concerned on the operating unit.
Behavior
The behavior of the Status button can be configured:
S
Switch:
The switch has two stable states. It toggles from one state to the other each
time it is operated, and remains in the respective state until it is operated again.
S
Key:
The button has a fixed, stable home position. When operated, it switches to the
status pressed and remains in this state as long as it is kept pressed. When
released, it automatically switches back to its released position.
Functions which have been assigned to the Status button can be triggered, for
example, by the following configurable events:
S
S
S
Status change
Pressing
Releasing
If the status of a switch type Status button changes as a result of a modification of
configured tags, not through operation, the corresponding function is not executed.
Display
The two indicator statuses of the types Switch and Button with acknowledgement
can be assigned different texts or graphics in ProTool CS which are then displayed
on the Status button during runtime.
Figure 5-3 illustrates an example of a Status button of the type Switch when
pressed (left) and not pressed (right).
Figure 5-3
The two statuses relate to the Status button when the Switch option is set
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-19
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Operation
Proceed as follows to operate a Status button:
S MP 270B Key / OP 270:
– Select the Status button e.g. using a cursor key.
– Press either the Enter key or the Spacebar.
(e.g.)
or
S MP 270B Touch / TP 270:
Touch the Status button on the touch screen.
Note
Release
In the case of a button, a function is triggered when the pressed button is
released.
If the button is pressed using the mouse button or finger (when using touch
panels) but moved outside, the function is triggered when the function is released.
Press
In the case of a button, a function is triggered as soon as the button is pressed.
5-20
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
5.10
Switch
Purpose
A switch serves for the input and output of a binary status. It can only be switched
on or off. It is linked to a tag to do this. The status OFF corresponds to the value 0
(a logical FALSE) of the tag linked to the switch. All tag values other than zero (a
logical TRUE) are interpreted as the status ON.
Behavior
Functions which have been assigned to the switch, can be triggered, for example,
by the following, configurable events:
S
S
S
Status change
Switched on
Switched off
If the switch status changes as a result of a modification of configured tags, not
through operation, the corresponding function is not executed.
Display
Figure 5-4 illustrates an example of two switches with different orientation.
Figure 5-4
Switches with different orientation
Operation
Proceed as follows to operate a switch:
S MP 270B Key / OP 270:
– Select the required button e.g. using a cursor key.
– Press either the Enter key or the Spacebar.
(e.g.)
or
S MP 270B Touch / TP 270:
Slide the sliding lever to the required position or double-click on the object.
The switch moves to the new position.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-21
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
5.11
Release 12/01
Messages
Message categories
Messages on the operating unit indicate events and statuses related to control
processes. A differentiation is made between the following message categories:
S
Event messages
indicate a status in the process, for example, Motor ON. Event messages are
configured.
S
Alarm messages
indicate an equipment failure, for example, Motor temperature too high.
Alarm messages are configured. Alarm messages must be acknowledged due
to their critical nature.
S
HMI system messages
are triggered by the operating unit. They are not configured. System messages
indicate, for example, incorrect operations or communication faults. A selection
of important system messages is provided in Appendix C.
SIMATIC diagnostic events
provide information on the status of the SIMATIC S7 and SIMOTION. They are
not configured in the ProTool CS configuration software. Refer to the S7
manual for the error number indicated on the operating unit to determine the
cause of the error.
S
Acknowledging alarm messages
Alarm messages must be acknowledged due to their importance. This
can be done manually on the operating unit or automatically by the PLC.
The message indicator depicted continues to flash as long as queued
messages still need to be acknowledged, when this feature has been
configured.
The message indicator on the MP 270B Touch and TP 270 can be
operated (refer to Page 5-2).
In order to acknowledge alarm messages on the MP 270B Key or
OP 270 manually, press the key depicted on the right. The message
must not have been selected. The LED integrated in the key lights up
when unacknowledged messages are present.
If several messages are displayed at the same time and the user acknowledges
alarm messages, the acknowledgement acts in hierarchical sequence on the
various message displays:
1. Message display with focus
2. Alarm window
3. Message line
4. Message display in basic screen
5-22
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
When configuring messages, it is possible to define whether the operator must
acknowledge each message individually or whether the acknowledgement is valid
for a group of messages (group acknowledgement). The use of group
acknowledgement in respect of messages is particularly useful when they relate to
the same cause, e.g. the messages for the first-up fault and the follow-up faults.
Buffering messages
All message events (arrived, cleared, acknowledged) are stored in an internal
volatile buffer. If a message archive has been configured, the message events are
also stored in this message archive.
Display messages
The events stored in the message buffer can be displayed according to different
criteria. The following predefined objects are available for display purposes:
S
Message line (Page 5-25)
S
Message window (Page 5-25)
S
Message page (Page 5-28)
S
Message buffer (Page 5-29)
S
Message view
– Message display with full functionality (Page 5-31)
– Single message display with restricted functionality (Page 5-32)
Deleting messages
All message events concerning event and alarm messages are automatically
stored in the message buffer. There are two methods of deleting message events
from the message buffer:
S
Automatic deletion on buffer overflow
When the message buffer is no longer capable of accepting new message
events, the operating unit automatically deletes a number of message events
until the configured remaining buffer capacity is reached. In this case, the oldest
message events are deleted first.
S
Deletion by operating the operating unit
In order that message events can be deleted manually from the message
buffer, the function Delete_message_buffer must be defined in the
configuration, e.g. linked to a button or function key. In this way, the following
message categories can be selected for deletion according to the configuration:
– All messages
– Alarm messages
– Event messages
– HMI system messages
– SIMATIC diagnostic events
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-23
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Print messages
When correspondingly configured, event messages can be printed out directly
when the message events Arrived and Cleared occur, and also alarm messages
when the event Acknowledged occurs. System messages are not logged.
Information on setting printer parameters is provided in Chapter 8.
5.11.1
ALARM_S
Definition
ALARM_S is a message number procedure. The message identification numbers
are assigned automatically by the configuration in STEP 7 or SIMOTION SCOUT.
The unique assignment of the message text is made according to these numbers.
The advantage here is that the message texts can be used on various operating
units but only need to be entered once.
If a fault occurs, the operating unit receives the message by means of the
message number. The associated message is determined and issued according to
the number.
In addition to the message status (arrived, cleared, acknowledged), the PLC also
stores time. This information is retained even after the message has been sent, so
that individual network components (e.g. operating units) can log on later and be
updated.
Configuring ALARM_S messages
ALARM_S messages are not configured in ProTool CS but in STEP 7, e.g.
for S7-300/400-CPUs or in SIMOTION SCOUT. The display of ALARM_S
messages can only be configured when a SIMATIC S7 PLC is used and the
ProTool CS configuration software has been integrated in STEP 7.
Detailed information on the configuration of ALARM_S messages is available in the
ProAgent/MP and ProAgent/PC user guides.
Restarting S7 CPUs
Depending on the hardware configuration of the CPUs, it is possible that under
certain circumstances all queued ALARM_S messages will be deleted when S7
CPUs are restarted. Older stocks of S7 300 CPUs cannot inform the operating
units involved of the restart. The result of this is that messages are indicated on
the operating unit as being queued although the CPU has already deleted them.
5-24
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Remedy:
Disconnect the connection between the operating unit and CPU and then
reconnect them again. Use the function Connect_Disconnect_PLC if configured.
5.11.2
Message line
Purpose
When a message line has been configured it is always displayed, regardless of the
screen selected. The message line displays the last alarm or event message
received. The message line is a permanent feature on the operating unit and
always displays the current message. If a separate window has been configured
for alarm messages, the message line only receives the current event message.
Display priorities
Alarm messages always have priority over event messages. If no alarm messages
are present or they have all been acknowledged, event messages are displayed.
In order to differentiate between event and alarm messages, alarm messages can
be configured to flash in the display.
5.11.3
Message window
Purpose
The message window displays all messages in the respective message categories
which are queued or need to be acknowledged.
It is possible to configure how the alarm messages are sorted. It is also possible to
select whether the latest or oldest message is displayed first.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-25
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Alarm messages
If one of the display modes Window/Window, Window/Line or Window/Off is
configured, the message window for alarm messages opens automatically as soon
as an alarm message arrives. Figure 5-5 illustrates an example.
Figure 5-5
Alarm window (example)
Significance of the buttons
Call Help text
Use this button to call in the help text configured for the
selected message.
Edit Message
Use this button to trigger the function assigned to the
Edit Message event for the selected message.
Acknowledge messages
Use this button to acknowledge messages.
Event messages
In order to be able to open the event message window by means of unit operation,
the function Display_event_message_window must be linked to a function key or
button in the configuration.
System messages
The message window for system messages opens automatically as soon as a
system message arrives. The window is closed automatically after the configured
duration of display has expired or by pressing ESC or
5-26
.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Close alarm window manually
Proceed as follows to close the message window manually:
S MP 270B Touch / TP 270:
Press the button illustrated.
In the case of the MP270B Key and OP 270, the alarm window can only be closed
after acknowledging all the alarm messages displayed.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-27
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
5.11.4
Release 12/01
Message page
Purpose
The message page displays all messages allocated a time stamp. It is also
possible to select whether the latest or oldest message is displayed first. Open
message pages are constantly updated.
Structure
In order to have access to the message page for event messages and/or alarm
messages, the following functions must have been configured:
S
for event messages: Display_event_message_page
S
for alarm messages: Display_alarm_message_page
Figure 5-6 illustrates an example of the message page for alarm messages.
Figure 5-6
Alarm message page (example)
Information on the significance of the buttons is provided on Page 5-26.
In the case of the MP 270B Touch or TP 270, the alarm message page can also
be selected using the message indicator (Page 5-2).
It is possible to configure how the alarm messages are sorted.
5-28
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
5.11.5
Message buffer
Purpose
The message buffer displays all message events allocated a time stamp. It is also
possible to select whether the latest or oldest message is displayed first.
Structure
In order to have access to the message buffer for event messages and/or alarm
messages, the following functions must have been configured:
S
for event messages: Display_event_message_buffer
S
for alarm messages: Display_alarm_message_buffer
Figure 5-7 illustrates an example alarm message buffer.
Figure 5-7
Alarm buffer (example)
Information on the significance of the buttons is provided on Page 5-26.
The message buffer is organized so that in the case of a buffer overflow the oldest
message events are overwritten (”FIFO buffer”). It is also possible to delete the
entire buffer or specific message categories from time to time
(Delete_message_buffer) function. This relieves the system load and provides a
clearer overview of the message buffer.
Note
The data in the message buffer is volatile and is deleted when voltage is applied.
It is possible to configure how the alarm messages are sorted.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-29
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
5.11.6
Release 12/01
Message display
Purpose
Certain views are defines for messages which are queued or still to be
acknowledged or for message events in the message buffer (volatile or archive) in
the message indicator. Various filter criteria are available in ProTool CS for this
purpose.
Filter criteria include:
S
Message number
S
Time
S
Message states
S
Message text
S
Date
S
Category name
S
Acknowledgment group
S
Diagnostics capability
S
PLC
The attribute PLC is only useful when more than one PLC is configured as source
of the message. In this way, the precise fault location can be displayed with
date/time of the message event.
Note
Please note that the millisecond display for the time concerning the occurrence of
message events is only accurate for ALARM_S messages. In the case of event
and alarm messages, the milliseconds always appear with the value ooo.
5-30
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Structure
The message display (Figure 5-8) can display the following messages:
S
queued messages,
S
archived messages,
S
messages to be acknowledged,
S
message events, located in the buffer,
S
diagnostic events.
Figure 5-8
Example of a message display
Significance of the buttons
Call Help text
Use this button to call in the help text configured for the
selected message.
Edit Message
Use this button to trigger the function assigned to the
Edit Message event for the selected message.
Acknowledge messages
Use this button to acknowledge messages.
Message categories
In order to be able to distinguish between the different message categories, they
are marked in the first column of the message display:
!
Alarm messages
Empty
Event messages
$
HMI system messages
S7
SIMATIC diagnostic events
Alarm-S messages are displayed either as alarm messages or event messages.
SFM messages (System Fault Messages) are displayed as alarm messages.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-31
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
5.11.7
Release 12/01
Single message display
Purpose
A single message display provides a subset of the functionality of a message
display (Page 5-31). This provides a simple method with which, for example, to
create a message line to display event and system messages in a screen.
Structure
The figure below provides an example of a single message display with the
following columns configured:
S
S
S
S
S
Date
Time
Message number
Message states
Message text
25.01.01 14:27:06 110001 K
Change to operating status ’online’
25.01.01 14:27:07 140001 K
Connection discontinued: Station 2, Rack 0, Slot 0
5-32
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
5.12
Bar Graph
Purpose
Bar graphs present a value in the form of a rectangular area. The operating unit
thus provides a clear indication of how far the current value is from the limit values,
or if a setpoint value has been reached, at a glance. Bar graphs can be used to
display fill levels or quantities, for example.
Display
It is possible to configure minimum and maximum values and the direction bar
graph moves by increasing the tag value:
Figure 5-9 depicts the various states of a horizontal bar graph:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Value drops below the minimum value configured
Value lies within the configured display range
Value exceeds the maximum value configured
Value lies within the configured limit range
Figure 5-9
Different bar states
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-33
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
5.13
Release 12/01
Trend View
Purpose
The trend view is a particularly clear form of displaying process data in a
continuous manner. In the case of processes that only change slowly, the trend
view can visualize events that have already occurred and provides access to, and
estimate of trends in the process sequence. On the other hand, data issued
concerning processes which run quickly can be easily evaluated using this form of
trend view.
Configurable properties
A number of different trends can be displayed simultaneously in the trend view.
The following properties are among those which can be configured for a trend
graphic:
S
Trend Type: Realtime trend or History trend
S
Triggering: Cycle triggering or Bit triggering
S
Limit values: Upper and lower limits
The operating unit displays the points at which configured limit values are
reached or exceeded by changing the color of the trend view.
S
Color: Uncertain status
The uncertain status function highlights areas of the trend view in which
communication to the unit was interrupted and, as a result, no values could be
recorded.
Read line
The read line function is used in a trend graphic to display or hide a read line which
displays Y-values associated to an X-value.
The read line can be activated by means of the Trend_view_read_mark_on_off
function or the X-axis tab control of the trend view Properties dialog (default: Off).
When the function is activated, a button is provided in the trend view with which to
activate and deactivate the read line. The color of the read line can be configured
in the Color tab control.
If the Display Values Table function is activated in the Value Table tab control, a
table appears in the trend view containing the values of the trend curve displayed.
The read line can be operated in the trend view by means of touch, mouse
(cursor), keyboard (Ctrl + Alt + cursor right/left) or button. It is also possible to
configure buttons for the functions Trend_view_read_mark_forward and
Trend_view_read_mark_backward. When the read line is moved, the values in the
value table (when activated) are automatically updated accordingly.
5-34
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Structure
Figure 5-10 illustrates an example of a trend view with a trend and buttons
configured for navigating within the trend.
Trend
Figure 5-10
Tag connection
Value
X value
Operable trend view with read line (example)
Navigation using the buttons on the MP 270B Touch or TP 270
It is possible to navigate through the trend using the configured buttons. The
individual buttons have the following significance:
Button
Function
Start/Stop update
Interrupts the current updating process for the trend until
the button is pressed again.
Back to start
Scrolls back to the start of the trend recording.
Scroll
Shifts the trend section half a window width to the
left/right.
Zoom in/out
section
Expands/compresses the trend view horizontally.
Read line on/off
Switches the read line on or off.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-35
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Button
Function
Read line
forwards
Moves the read line to the right.
Read line
backwards
Moves the read line to the left.
Navigation using the keyboard on the MP 270B Key or OP 270
If no buttons have been projected in the trend view, it is possible to navigate
through it using the keyboard (with the MP 270B Key and OP 270 using the unit
keyboard or USB keyboard, with the MP 270B Touch and TP 270 using the USB
keyboard). A condition for this is that the configuration supports navigation using
the keyboard.
Keys
Function
Back to start
Scrolls back to the start of the trend recording.
Scroll back
Scroll one screen width back.
Scroll forward
Scroll one screen width forward.
Zoom section
Expands the trend horizontally.
Reduce section
Compresses the size of the trend horizontally.
Read line
forwards
Moves the read line to the right in the trend
curve.
Read line
backwards
Moves the read line to the left in the trend curve.
Notice
It is not possible to interrupt the updating of the trend using the keyboard.
Display archive data as a trend
If data stored in an archive is displayed in the trend view, it is represented as
history trends, i.e. the trend data is read out of the archive and displayed according
to events. Application for trends of this kind are power-on processes or
temperature patterns on heating up an oven.
The trend view is not updated when the archive data changes.
5-36
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
5.14
Slider Control
Purpose
Use a slider control to enter and display numeric values in analog form. To enter
values, move the slider to the required position. When used as a display element,
the value is represented by the position of the slider.
Function
The slider control is linked to a tag. On moving the user-controlled slider, the
corresponding value is written to the tag. Conversely, when the tag value is
changed, the position of the moving slider is changed correspondingly, unless it
being moved by the operator at that moment.
Display
The figure on the right illustrates an example of a slider for
setting and displaying temperature values. The current value
(in this case: 50) appears as plain text and as a bar graph.
Operation
Proceed as follows to operate a slider control:
S
MP 270B Touch / TP 270:
Point to the moveable slider and move it to the desired
value.
S
MP 270B / OP 270:
In order to operate the slider, select it using a cursor key, for example. Use the
following keys to actually move the slider:
Function
Keys
Increase value
Reduce value
Increase/Decrease value in steps of 5%
Move to maximum value/minimum value
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-37
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
!
5-38
Release 12/01
Caution
In the following cases, it is possible that the value indicated by the slider control
differs from the real value of the related tag:
S
The value range configured for the slider control (minimum and maximum
values) does not correspond with the limit values configured for the slider
control tag .
S
An invalid password is entered for a slider control protected by a password.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
5.15
Analog Display
Purpose
An analog display indicates numeric values as a pointer instrument.
Function
The analog display is linked to a tag. When the tag value changes, the pointer
position changes correspondingly. The display can be configured to include a
non-return pointer. At runtime, the non-return pointer indicates the maximum value
reached so far by the value being displayed. It is reset when the current window is
opened.
The analog display is purely a display element. Therefore, it is not possible to enter
values.
Display
Figure 5-11 illustrates an example of an analog display indicating temperatures.
Figure 5-11
Example of a typical analog display
Note on instrument scale
Any color-code differentiations configured for various scale ranges are not
displayed on the operating unit.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-39
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
5.16
Release 12/01
Digital/Analog Clock
Purpose
The digital/analog clock provides the option of displaying the system time in
numbers (digital) or as a clock with hands (analog). The digital display also
includes the current date. The display format is language dependent. It is based on
the format defined by the operating unit’s operating system.
Display
The digital/analog clock is purely a display element. This means that the date and
time cannot be set. In order to set the date and time, use the Date/Time screen
object (Page 5-14).
Figure 5-12 illustrates an example of a configured analog clock.
Figure 5-12
5-40
Example of a typical analog clock
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
5.17
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Password List
Purpose
While the system is being configured using ProTool CS, additional operating
elements can be protected against unauthorized use by means of passwords.
Important parameters and settings can then only be modified by authorized
personnel. The password level and user name are stored with the password.
The Report_password_change function causes a system message to be issued
when a different password is entered on the operating unit, i.e. a new user logs on.
If the system messages are archived, all login and logout procedures can be
established.
The Write_user_name_to_tag function is used to write the name of the user
currently logged on into a tag of type “STRING”. If the tag is one with a PLC link,
the user name also exists in the PLC and can be used for the user-dependent
enabling of certain functions. User names must always be unique for the
assignment. They are stored in a password file.
Password hierarchy
Hierarchically defined password levels from 0 to 9 exist for password protection
purposes. When a password is assigned to an individual user or to a whole user
group, the permission to execute functions at a specific level is assigned
simultaneously. If, for example, a user is assigned to password level 4, he or she
is authorized to execute functions of password levels 0 to 4.
Password level
Password level 0:
This minimum password level is assigned to functions that have no, or only a
minimal effect on the course of the process. In order to trigger functions assigned
to Password Level 0, no password needs to be entered.
Password levels 1 to 8:
Functions are assigned to levels 1 to 8 according to their increasing importance.
Before triggering a function with a password level greater than 0, the operating unit
requests the corresponding password to be entered.
Password level 9
Only the supervisor (system support specialist or service technician) is granted
authorization to execute functions assigned to password level 9. The supervisor is
authorized to access all the functions on the operating unit.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-41
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Logging in on the operating unit (Login)
After calling a function protected by a password, the operating unit automatically
requests the entry of a password. Once entered, the password need not be
entered again in order to call in other functions of this password level or lower.
When correspondingly configured, it is also possible to log in on the operating unit
via an input field for confidential password entry (Page 5-10). The character string
entered is represented by placeholders (*).
Logoff
In order to rule out operation by unauthorized personnel, a password level greater
than 0 should not remain active on the operating unit over too long a period of
time. The following options are available to explicitly reset passwords levels:
S
Configured logout time expires
If the operating unit is not operated within the period of time configured (logout
time), the current password level is automatically reset to 0.
S
Manual logout
If the function Logoff_user is linked to an operating element in the configuration,
it can be used to reset the current password level to 0.
Note
It is also possible to reset the current password level to 0 by entering an
incorrect password.
5.17.1
Password management
Purpose
Individual users can be entered in a password list on the operating unit and
assigned a password level according to their specific responsibilities. When
processing the list, conclude each field entry by pressing the Enter key. The
password list contains all the passwords configured on the operating unit. The list
is coded and stored on the operating unit, protected against a power failure.
5-42
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Figure 5-13 illustrates an example of a password list with six entries.
User
Figure 5-13
Password
Level
Example of a password list
View password list
Only those passwords with user names are displayed which have a password level
equal to or lower than that with which the user is currently logged in. The operating
unit displays the password list entries in alphabetic order.
Creating a password
The user can only edit the password list up to the level with which he is currently
logged in. All passwords used in the system must be unique. It is not possible to
assign the same password to different password levels. However, there are no
restrictions in assigning different passwords to the same password levels.
Deleting a password
To delete a password from the password list, overwrite the password level
assigned to it with 0.
5.17.2
Export/Import password list
Purpose
If a system includes several operating units which are accessed by the same
users, the same passwords must be installed on each operating unit. In order that
the password lists need not be re-entered on each unit, it can be created on one
unit and then exported and imported on other units.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-43
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Note
During an import, all currently valid password are overwritten. The imported
passwords become valid immediately.
If an existing user name or password is entered, the corresponding system
message is issued.
Condition
In order to be able to export/import password lists on the operating unit, the
Export_Import_Passwords function must be linked to a button or function key, for
example. The file name of the password list to be exported/imported must be
specified as the function parameter during configuration.
Notice
5-44
S
The password list is coded. It cannot be edited with external tools.
S
Do not export a password list directly after it has been modified. Exit the screen
object Password List after changing it and wait with the export function until
modifications have been written in the internal Flash memory.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
5.18
Status/Force
Purpose
The operating unit access the connected PLC and periphery to read and write
values. PLC program operands can be monitored and modified easily without
having to connect an additional programming unit or PC to the PLC.
This option is particularly useful during the testing and commissioning phase of the
configuration.
Condition
The following conditions must be fulfilled in order to be able to access values in the
PLC directly from the operating unit
S
S
The connected PLC is a SIMATIC S5 or SIMATIC S7
The configuration must contain the screen object Status/Force (Figure 5-14)
Structure
Figure 5-14 illustrates the basic structure of the screen object Status/Force. Each
line represents an operand.
Figure 5-14
Status/Force: Example for SIMATIC S7
The column sequence can be changed when a USB mouse is connected. In order,
for instance, to swap the Format and Force Value columns, move the column
heading Force Value onto the column heading Format.
The table indicates the significance of the individual columns and buttons.
Column/Button
Function
Connection
Select the PLC whose address area is to be displayed
and/or modified.
Type, DB number, Offset, Bit
Specify the address in this column.
Data type, Format
This column is used to change the format of the output.
Status value
This column displays the values of the operands read from
the PLC.
Force value
Use this column to enter the values to be written to the
operands.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-45
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
Column/Button
Function
This button is used to update the display in the column
Status value.
The button is locked after being pressed. None of the
input fields can then be used until the button is pressed
again, thus stopping the update.
This button is used to apply the new value specified in the
column Force value. The value is then written to the PLC.
Operation
Proceed as follows to operate the Status/Force screen object:
MP 270B Touch, TP 270:
Touch the operating element required. Either the screen keyboard is displayed or a
selection list is opened, depending on the input field.
MP 270B Key, OP 270:
The table depicts the key combinations for operation using the keyboard.
Keys
Function
Operate button Write.
Operate button Read.
Select first/last field in current line.
Select first/last field in current column.
Increase width of current column.
Reduce width of current column.
Delete current line.
Alternatively:
Do not select a PLC from the Connection column.
Optimize column width.
Open selection field.
5-46
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
Release 12/01
5.19
SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library
Purpose
The SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library is a comprehensive library containing graphics
from the areas of techniques and production. The library extends the possibilities
of producing screens for the project in large numbers and representing aspects
realistically. The following screen objects (graphics) are included, for example, in a
wide range of categories:
S
valves, motors, tank containers,
S
conveyor belts,
S
factory buildings,
S
3D ISA symbols,
S
cooling and heating systems.
Settings
Using the screen editor, any object in the SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library can be
inserted in the current screen and edited as required. In addition to the standard
tab controls for all the screen objects (Functions, Position, Color, Attributes, Name
and Enable), the SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library provides two further tab controls:
S
Symbol:
Selection of the required symbol.
S
Style:
Settings for color filling, transparency and orientation of the screen object and
configuration of a tag:
– It is possible to modify the appearance and representation of symbols and
background.
– Symbols can be mirrored and/or turned in steps of 90°.
– The cursor can be assigned an additional lightning symbol when moving
over the screen in order to emphasize to a user the configuration of a
function, for example (only possible with MP 270B Touch and TP 270).
– It is possible to configure a tag for the symbol and, thus, control its color
representation in accordance with falling below or exceeding limit value
ranges.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
5-47
Operating Screens and Screen Objects
5-48
Release 12/01
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
6
Recipes
6.1
Overview
Purpose
The purpose of recipes is to transfer of quantities of related data together and
synchronously from the operating unit to the PLC and back again.
Principles of operation
Using the example of the filing cabinet (Figure 6-1), the two terms Recipe and Data
Record should be defined because they are important for subsequent
understanding of the process.
Fruit juice plant
Grapefruit
Lemon
Nectar
Juice
Drink
Orange
Apple
Figure 6-1
Recipe and Data Record, using a filing cabinet as an analogy
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
6-1
Recipes
Release 12/01
S
Recipe
Recipes correspond to the individual drawers of the filing cabinet illustrated (e.g.
grapefruit or lemon). The reference value fields (tags) belonging to the particular
recipe are defined in each drawer. The recipes define the data structure in
ProTool CS. This structure cannot be modified later on the operating unit.
S
Data record
Data records correspond to the filing cards in the individual drawers of the
cabinet (e.g. Drink, Juice and Nectar). A data record contains the values for a
recipe. Data records are created, modified and deleted on the operating unit.
The data records are also stored on the operating unit. This saves storage
space on the PLC.
The Import/Export function provides the additional option of using external tools
to edit exported data records e.g. Excel and then reimporting them on the
operating unit.
Example of a recipe
An example for use of a recipe is its application on a filling station of a fruit juice
system. The same filling station is used to produce orange drink, orange juice and
orange nectar. The mixing ratios are different for each product. The ingredients are
always the same.
Assume that a recipe called Mixture is created, which has the following data
structure:
Tag
Name
Var_2
l orange
Var_3
l water
Var_4
kg sugar
Var_5
g flavor
The designations l Orange, g Aroma etc. of the tags are the so called entry
names. The entry names are also displayed on the operating unit. In this way, for
example, the tag Var_2 can be identified as the tag designating the mixture
component Orange.
The data records contain the values for the different drink types. The data records
may appear as follows, for instance:
Orange drink
6-2
Orange juice
Orange nectar
l orange
90
l orange
95
l orange
70
l water
10
l water
5
l water
30
kg sugar
1.5
kg sugar
0.5
kg sugar
1.5
g flavor
200
g flavor
100
g flavor
400
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Recipes
Release 12/01
6.2
Use of Recipes
The following section contains a description of the data flow for recipes and three
application scenarios illustrating the use of recipes in the form of short, practical
examples. They should provide a top level overview of the possibilities for using
recipes:
6.2.1
S
The first scenario illustrates a recipe configuration in which the data entered is
not immediately transferred to the PLC. This configuration is used, for example,
when it is necessary to enter data on the operating unit without interfering with
an active process.
S
In the second scenario, data is immediately transferred to the PLC. This
configuration can be used, for example, to start up a machine and correct the
positioning data online.
S
The third scenario implements data record functions in order to control
production automatically via a job list.
Data Flow for Recipes
The diagram illustrates various possibilities concerning data flow when using
recipes. The data flow between the active components operating unit (A), PLC (B)
and external data medium (C) is dependent on the configuration of the recipe and
the functions used.
Recipe_1
Recipe_2
Recipe_n
External
data medium
Storage medium
Display
PLC
Figure 6-2
Data flow for recipes
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
6-3
Recipes
Release 12/01
The operating unit (A) stores the recipe data records on a storage medium, e.g.
Flash or hard disk. The recipe data record can be edited in a recipe view or recipe
screen on the operating unit display:
S
A new data record can be entered and can then, for example, be stored (2) on
the storage medium and transferred (3) to the PLC (B).
S
The data record can be exported to an external data medium (C), e.g. a PC.
The data record is saved in CSV format, regardless of the recipe. This file can
then be loaded and edited in MS Excel, for example.
S
A data record can be loaded (2) from the operating unit storage medium or
import (1) it as a *.CSV file from an external data medium.
A recipe data record can also be transferred (4) directly from the storage medium
to the PLC or loaded from the PLC to the storage medium. In the same way, a
recipe in the display can be transferred (3) to the PLC or loaded from it.
6.2.2
Application examples
Scenario 1: Enter data record
Production data must be entered on operating unit (A) without interfering in the
active process. The production data should not be transferred to the PLC (B).
Recipe_1
Recipe_2
Recipe_n
External
data medium
Storage medium
Display
PLC
Figure 6-3
Process
Enter the production data in the recipe view or recipe screen, assign a data record
name and save the new data record on the operating unit storage medium.
6-4
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Recipes
Release 12/01
Scenario 2: Manual production process
The production data should be read from the PLC (B) according the workpiece to
be processed and displayed on the operating unit screen (A) to be checked. It
should be possible to correct the production data transferred online, if necessary.
Notice
This is a special application scenario because it cannot be realized on all HMI
devices.
Recipe_1
Recipe_2
Recipe_n
External
data medium
Storage medium
Display
PLC
Figure 6-4
Process
A reading device, e.g. connected to the PLC, reads out a bar-code from the
workpiece to be edited. The data record name corresponds to the respective
bar-code designation. As a result, the PLC can load the required data record from
the operating unit’s storage medium. The data record appears in the display for
control purposes. Modifications are immediately transferred to the PLC.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
6-5
Recipes
Release 12/01
Scenario 3: Automatic production process
Production should be automated by means of a job list. The production data should
be transferred directly to the PLC (B) either from the data medium in the operating
unit (A) or from an external data medium (C). It is not necessary to show it in the
display.
Recipe_1
Recipe_2
Recipe_n
External
data medium
Storage medium
Display
PLC
Figure 6-5
Process
Production can be controlled via one or more VB scripts which automatically
transfer the production data records to the PLC. The process can be controlled by
means of return values of the functions used
The automatic production process can be realized using the data record functions
provided: The Import_Data_Records function loads data records from a *.CSV file
to the data medium. The Data_Record_DAT_to_PLC function transfers a data
record from the data medium to the PLC.
6-6
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Recipes
Release 12/01
6.3
Recipe Configuration
Basic procedure
The basic steps to configuring a recipe are listed below:
1. Define the structure of the recipe:
Assign tags to the recipe structure. These tags are provided with entries from
the data records.
Define a name for the recipe. This name is used to select the recipe in the
configuration and on the operating unit.
2. Set recipe tag properties
The following options can be configured in ProTool CS:
– Synchronize tags
This option defines that the data from a data record has been read from the
PLC or data medium and written in the tag or read from the tags configured
for the recipe. This establishes a connection between the tags configured in
the recipe and the tags in the screens. When a data record is loaded, the
values are written to the tags used in the screens.
– Tags offline
If this option is also activated, the values entered are only stored in the tags,
and not transferred to the PLC. Otherwise, values entered are transferred
directly to the PLC.
3. Defining the storage location for the data records on the operating unit
The data storage location for data records can be configured. The following
settings are possible:
Storage location
Setting in ProTool CS
Internal Flash memory
\Flash\...
Memory card
S PC card (MP 270B only)
S CF card
S \Storage Card\...
S \Storage Card2\...
Network
Any path in the network, e.g.
\\PC_Name\... (target computer)
Caution
Cyclical writing access is not permitted for the internal Flash memory because it
reduces the service life of the Flash memory and thus the service life of the unit.
Use an external memory card instead.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
6-7
Recipes
Release 12/01
4. Set download synchronization
It is possible to configure whether the data records are downloaded to the PLC
with or without synchronization.
5. Creating recipe views/recipe screens
Configure one or more screens in order to create, store, and download data
records on the operating unit. Depending on the application, use either the
recipe view or create a copy of the system, e.g. using input/output fields in
recipe screens.
– Recipe view:
The recipe view enables an uncomplicated, quick method of handling
recipes and data records with a minimum of configuration work. Normally,
they are used to process data records with smaller recipes in table form.
– Recipe screen:
The operator can use recipe screens to customize the user interface for
editing data records and, for example, simulating the system visually,
providing graphics and individual masks for entering data records. Recipe
screens are particularly recommended for data records with a relatively large
number of entries.
Further information
Detailed information on how to create a recipe is provided in the online help to the
ProTool CS configuration software and in theProTool Configuring Windows-based
Systems user’s guide.
System limits
The table provides an overview of the system limits for recipes.
Elements
6-8
Number
Number of recipes
300
Data records per recipe
500 (limited by storage medium)
Entries per recipe
1000
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Recipes
Memory requirements for data records
The memory requirements per recipe (in kByte) is calculated from the three
summands D1 + D2 + D3.
D1 = [(no. of entries x 9 + tag name total length ) + 4] : 1024
D2 = [(no. of data records x 12) + 4] : 1024
D3 = [no. of data records x (data record length + N) + 4] : 1024
D1, D2 and D3 are rounded up to the next whole number.
A data record length is the sum of all the tag lengths configured for the data record
in bytes. For example, a tag of the type FLOAT has a length of 4 byte.
The tag name total length is the sum of the length of all the tag names which are
used in the entries.
The following applies for N:
Data record name < 13 characters: N = 12
Data record name > 12 characters: N = 40
Notice
The internal Flash memory has a maximum storage capacity of 64 kByte.
Note:
In the interest of optimizing the service life of the unit and achieving a better
performance, use either the network or an external memory card to store data
records.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
6-9
Recipes
6.4
Release 12/01
Editing Data Records
In this chapter
This chapter provides information on how to edit data records on the operating unit.
The following information is also included:
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Layout of the recipe view (Page 6-11)
Displaying data records (Page 6-14)
Creating new data records (Page 6-15)
Copying data records (Page 6-16)
Modifying data records (Page 6-17)
Copying data records by selecting a data record name (Page 6-17)
Renaming data records (Page 6-17)
Deleting data records (Page 6-18)
Reading data records from the PLC (Page 6-18)
Downloading data records to the PLC (Page 6-19)
Synchronizing a data record (Page 6-19)
Editing data records in recipe screens (Page 6-19)
Functions and PLC jobs (Page 6-23)
Exporting/Importing data records (Page 6-24)
Exporting, editing and importing data records (Page 6-26)
Reaction to changing the recipe structure (Page 6-27)
Methods
Data records can be edited on the operating unit in tables or screens:
6-10
S
Tabular editing
The recipe view is available for the tabular editing of data records (Page 6-11).
The recipe view enables recipes and data records to be handled in an
uncomplicated, quick way.
Normally, they are used to process data records with smaller recipes offline.
Values entered on the operating unit are not directly transferred to the PLC
when entered.
S
Editing in recipe screens
The project engineer can use recipe screens (Page 6-19) to customize the user
interface for editing data records and, for example, simulating the system
visually, providing graphics and individual masks for entering data records.
This method is typically used for processing medium and large data records
offline in the recipe view. The values entered on the operating unit are only
saved in the tags, not transferred to the PLC directly on input.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Recipes
Release 12/01
6.4.1
Recipe view
Purpose
The recipe view is typically used to edit recipe data records in tabular form. This
provides an uncomplicated method of displaying, creating, copying, modifying,
deleting and downloading data records on the operating unit.
All descriptions on editing data records provided in this Chapter 6.4.1 relates purely
to the use of the recipe view. Information on editing data records in recipe screens
is provided from Page 6-19.
Display
Figure 6-6 illustrates an example of the layout of the recipe view. Some of the
operating and display elements can be configured so that they are faded out on the
operating unit.
Figure 6-6
Layout of the recipe view (example)
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
6-11
Recipes
Release 12/01
Significance of the operating and display elements
No.
Function
Select recipe
If the corresponding function is enabled in ProTool CS, it is possible to
select a configured recipe in this selection field. The number of the
selected recipe is displayed to the right of the selection field. This
number is only relevant during the configuration. They cannot be
modified on the operating unit.
Select data record
As soon as a recipe has been selected, the data records available are
displayed in this field. In addition, the data record number is displayed to
the right. The number field only becomes active when the input of a data
record number is permitted, e.g. after changing the data record number
or creating a new data record.
View/Edit entries
This table contains all the entries which are configured in the selected
data record. Sorting complies to the configured sequence. The
right-hand column displays the associated values.
The entry names cannot be edited on the operating unit.
Create new data record
This button initiates the creation of a new data record. The
setpoint values are predefined with default values configured as
start values for the respective tags.
Key combinations:
Save data record
This button is used to save the current values of the date record
displayed on the operating unit data medium. The memory
location is defined in ProTool CS.
The data record is stored under the currently defined name and
number.
Key combinations:
Delete data record
This button is used to delete the data record currently displayed
for the defined recipe from the operating unit data medium.
Key combinations:
Read data record from the PLC
This button is used to read the data record related to the
currently set recipe from the PLC and display the values on the
operating unit.
Key combinations:
6-12
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Recipes
Release 12/01
No.
Function
Write data record in the PLC
This button is used to write the current data record values in the
PLC.
Key combinations:
Status bar
The operating unit displays the status of the current operation in this
line, e.g. Downloading.
Other buttons
The following buttons are only visible when they have been correspondingly
configured by means of an attribute in the recipe view:
Synchronize
This button is used to synchronize the data in a recipe view with the
associated tag. Modified values are written in the corresponding tags in
the table of a recipe view. Finally, all the values are read from the tags
to table, which is updated accordingly. This ensures consistency
between the recipe view and tags.
The button is only enabled for use in the case or recipes with
synchronized tags.
Key combinations:
=
Save data record as
After pressing this button, a dialog appears in which to select an existing
data record name and modify it. After confirming the dialog, the current
values are stored under the new name.
Key combinations:
!
*
Caution
S If the two options Synchronize Tags and Tags Offline are activated in the
configuration, the values from the table are applied when values in the tables
and screens are changed simultaneously.
S If the data record currently being edited in the recipe view is changed in the
background (e.g. by means of a PLC job), the recipe view is not automatically
updated.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
6-13
Recipes
Release 12/01
Notes on operation using the MP 270B Key or OP 270
S
Quick selection of recipes and data records
When the selection field is opened up, enter the first letter of the recipe or data
record to be selected to access the relevant area of long lists, thus speeding up
the selection procedure.
S
Edit entries
If the value marked in the recipe view is to be modified, it is initially deleted by
pressing one of the alphanumeric keys. This occurs with regard to all list
elements in Windows. In order to prevent this, proceed as follows:
– After selecting the value to be changed, press the Enter key.
– Move the text cursor to the position to be changed using the cursor keys.
– Insert the modifications.
– Confirm the changes, e.g. by pressing the Enter key.
Displaying data records
Proceed as follows to display data records on the operating unit data medium:
Step
1
Select recipe
Procedure
Step 1 is only possible when recipe selection has been
configured.
S Select the selection field for the configured recipes
(Position 1 in the figure on Page 6-11).
S Open the selection field and mark the required recipe in the
opened selection list.
S Confirm the selection.
2
Select data record
S Select the selection field for the existing data records
(Position 2 in the figure on Page 6-11).
S Open the selection field and mark the required data record in
the opened selection list.
S Confirm the selection.
The selected data record is loaded. The configured entries
are displayed in table form with name and setpoint value.
6-14
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Recipes
Release 12/01
Creating new data records
Proceed as follows to create new data records on the operating unit:
Step
1
Select recipe
Procedure
S Select the required recipe as described in Displaying data
records Step 1 on Page 6-14.
2
Create data record
S Press the key depicted on the left.
The data record name must then be entered. The lowest
possible possible number is proposed for the data record.
The entries in the table are preassigned with the configured
starting values.
3
Enter data record
name
S Enter a new data record name in the selection field for data
records (Position 2 in the figure on Page 6-11).
S After entering the data record name, the next free data
record number is automatically entered on the right. This
number can be changed, if necessary.
4
Change values
S Enter a setpoint value for each entry configured in the table
(Position 3 in the figure on Page 6-11).
5
Save data record
S Press the key depicted on the left.
The new data record is written on the data medium.
The operating unit responds with a system message if the
name or number entered already exist.
Storage location for new data records
The data storage location for the new data record can be configured. The following
settings are possible:
S
S
S
Internal Flash memory
Memory card
– PC card (MP 270B only)
– CF card
Any path in the network
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
6-15
Recipes
Release 12/01
Copying data records
In order to copy data records, save them under new names. Proceed as follows:
Step
1
2
Procedure
Select recipe and
data record
S Select the required recipe and the data record to be copied
Enter data record
name
S Enter a new data record name in the selection field for data
as described in Displaying data records , Steps 1 and 2 on
Page 6-14.
records (Position 2 in the figure on Page 6-11).
S After entering the data record name, the next free data
record number is automatically entered on the right. This
number can be changed, if necessary.
3
Save data record
S Press the key depicted on the left.
The new data record is written on the data medium.
The operating unit responds with a system message if the
name or number entered already exist.
Copying data records after selecting a data record name
Proceed as follows to copy an existing data record after selecting the data record
name:
Step
Procedure
Select recipe and
data record
S Select the required recipe and the data record to be copied
2
Change values
3
Save data record
as
S Modify the values necessary.
S Press the key depicted on the left.
1
as described in Displaying data records , Steps 1 and 2 on
Page 6-14.
A dialog opens containing a data record name selection field
which can be edited. The selection field contains the name of
the data record selected.
Select the required data record name and edit it. After
confirming with OK, a new data record is created under the
name specified with the current values based on the
previously selected data record.
The newly created data record is displayed in the recipe
view.
6-16
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Recipes
Release 12/01
Changing data records
Proceed as follows to change existing data records:
Step
1
2
Procedure
Select recipe and
data record
S Select the required recipe and the data record to be copied
Change values
S Change the setpoint value in the table
as described in Displaying data records , Steps 1 and 2 on
Page 6-14.
(Position 3 in the figure on Page 6-11).
The entry names cannot be edited on the operating unit.
3
Save data record
S Press the key depicted on the left.
The modified data record overwrites the original data record
on the data medium.
Notice
If large-scale modifications have been carried out in recipes in ProTool CS and,
after downloading the modified project, the data records on the operating unit data
medium deviate a great deal from the original recipe structure, it is recommended
to reorganize the data medium:
S export the data records of all the recipes (refer to Page 6-24).
S delete the data records using the function Delete_Data_Record_Memory.
S import the data records using the function Import_Data_Records.
In this way, all the tags no longer used are deleted.
Renaming data records
Proceed as follows to rename existing data records:
Step
1
2
Procedure
Select recipe and
data record
S Select the required recipe and the data record to be copied
Enter data record
name
S Enter a new data record name in the selection field for data
as described in Displaying data records , Steps 1 and 2 on
Page 6-14.
records (Position 2 in the figure on Page 6-11).
S After entering the data record name, the next free data
record number is automatically entered on the right. Reset
this number to its original value.
3
Save data record
S Press the key depicted on the left.
The modified data record is written on the data medium.
The operating unit responds with a system message if the
name or number entered already exist.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
6-17
Recipes
Release 12/01
Deleting data records
Proceed as follows to delete data records on the operating unit data medium:
Step
1
2
Procedure
Select recipe and
data record
S Select the required recipe and the data record to be modified
Delete data record
S Press the key depicted on the left.
as described in Displaying data records , Steps 1 and on
Page 6-14.
The data record is deleted from the data medium after
confirming a confirmation request.
Note
It is possible to configure the Delete_Data_Records function to directly delete
individual recipes, all data records in a recipe or all recipes. To delete data records
using this function, it is not necessary to configure a recipe view.
It is still possible to configure the Delete_Data_Record_From_Display function with
which the currently displayed data record will be deleted.
Reading data records from the PLC
Proceed as follows to update data records in the operating unit working memory
with values from the PLC:
Step
1
Select recipe
Procedure
S Select the required recipe as described in Displaying data
records Step 1 on Page 6-14.
2
Read values
S Press the key depicted on the left.
S The current values are read from the PLC and displayed.
3
Edit data records
S The data can then be edited, e.g. values modified, saved,
downloaded to PLC, etc.
The operating unit responds with a system message if
downloading from the PLC is not possible because, in cases
where synchronization with the PLC is configured, for
example, the data mailbox is currently locked.
6-18
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Recipes
Release 12/01
Downloading data records to the PLC
In order that a modified or new data record can take effect in the PLC, it must be
downloaded to the PLC.
Proceed as follows to download data records to the PLC:
Step
1
2
Procedure
Select recipe and
data record
S Select the required recipe and the data record to be
Write values
S Press the key depicted on the left.
downloaded as described in Displaying data records, Steps 1
and 2 on Page 6-14.
The values are written in the PLC.
The operating unit responds with a system message if
downloading from the PLC is not possible because, in cases
where synchronization with the PLC is configured, for
example, the data mailbox is currently locked.
Synchronizing a data record
Proceed as follows to synchronize the data in a recipe view with the associated
tag:
Step
1
2
6.4.2
Procedure
Select recipe and
data record
S Select the required recipe and the data record to be copied
Synchronize data
record
S Press the key depicted on the left.
as described in Displaying data records , Steps 1 and 2 on
Page 6-14.
Modified values in the recipe view are written in the
corresponding tags. Finally, all the values are read from the
tags to table, which is updated accordingly. This ensures
consistency between the recipe view and tags.
Recipe screens
Purpose
Recipe screens are normally representations of the system. The screens provide
display and operating elements with which to create, save, modify, delete and
download data records. Large recipes can be split into several topic-specific
screens and clearly displayed, e.g. with graphic elements.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
6-19
Recipes
Release 12/01
Components for editing data records
In order to be able to edit data records in recipe screens on the operating unit, the
corresponding components, e.g. input/output fields and functions, must
be configured:
S
Recipe view:
Recipe screens can contain a recipe view (Page 6-11) not only to enable the
easy selection of recipes and data records but also for editing data records. The
configured functional range of the recipe view can vary, according to the
intended purpose.
Information on editing data records in recipe screens is provided from
Page 6-11. The instructions stipulated there generally also apply for editing data
records in recipe screens. However, in this case, input is performed in the
screens.
S
Functions:
Depending on whether a recipe view is configured in the project or not, and on
the properties assigned to it, there are various functions available to transfer
data records between operating unit and PLC, e.g.:
for recipe views
– Load_Data_Record
– Save_Data_Record_from_Display_as
– Save_Data_Record_from_Display
– Delete_Data_Record_from Display
– Synchronize_Data_Record_in_Display
– Data_Record_Display_to_PLC
– Data_Record_PLC_to_Display
for recipe screens
– Load_Data_Record
– Save_Date_Record
– Delete_Data_Record
– Data_Record_PLC_to_Tags
– Data_Record_Tags_to_PLC
– Recipe_Tags_Online_Offline
for downloading data records between data medium and PLC
– Data_Record_DAT_to_PLC
– Data_Record_PLC_to_DAT
for exporting and importing data records
– Export_Data_Records
– Import_Data_Records
6-20
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Recipes
Release 12/01
Further functions for recipes:
– Delete_Data_Record_Memory
– Convert_Data_Record_Number_to_Name
More functions and PLC jobs, which are linked to the downloading of data records,
are described on Page 6-23.
Note
It is possible to read in data or data records from the PLC. To do this, functions
such as Data_Records_PLC_to_Tags or Data_Records_Tags_to_PLC and
parameters such as Recipe number/name and Data record number/name are
available in which to assign specific names.
Editing data records offline
The way in which data records are edited on the operating unit is defined during
configuration. It is typically used for the offline editing of data records in recipe
screens. Values entered on the operating unit are not directly transferred to the
PLC when entered.
Proceed as follows to edit data screens in recipe screens offline:
Step
1
Procedure
Trigger reading of the selected data record from the storage medium:
S With recipe view
It is automatically loaded on selecting the data record. Select the required
data record as described in Displaying data records in Steps 1 and 2 on
Page 6-14.
S Without recipe view
Activate the operating element linked with the Load_Data_Record function.
The function parameters must have been set accordingly beforehand.
2
The data of the data record is written to the tags.
3
Edit the tags using the configured input/output fields.
4
Save the modified tags.
S With recipe view
Click the Save button. If necessary, you must first specify a new name.
S Without recipe view
Activate the operating element linked with the Save_Date_Record. The
function parameters must have been set accordingly beforehand.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
6-21
Recipes
Release 12/01
Editing data records online
In order to edit data records online, the option must either be defined during
configuration or the Recipe_Tags_Online_Offline function defined in the
configuration. In the case of online editing, the values entered are transferred
directly to the PLC. This method is normally used when commissioning the
machine/system in order to test, run-up and position.
Proceed as follows to edit data records on the operating unit online:
Step
Procedure
1
If data records are edited offline in the configuration, switch to offline mode at
this point by using the Recipe_Tags_Online_Offline function.
2
Trigger reading of the selected data record from the storage medium:
S With recipe view
It is automatically loaded on selecting the data record. Select the required
data record as described in Displaying data records in Steps 1 and 2 on
Page 6-14.
S Without recipe view
Activate the operating element linked with the Load_Data_Record function.
The function parameters must have been set accordingly beforehand.
3
The data of the data record is written to the tags and thus also to the PLC.
4
Edit the tags using the configured input/output fields. This will simultaneously
change the values in the PLC as well.
5
Save the modified tags.
S With recipe view
Click the Save button. If necessary, you must first specify a new name.
S Without recipe view
Activate the operating element linked with the Save_Data_Record. The
function parameters must have been set accordingly beforehand.
!
6-22
Warning
When editing data records online, the entered values are transferred to the PLC
without synchronization. Therefore, when changing individual values, ensure that
no impermissible operating statuses occur in the machine/system.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Recipes
Release 12/01
6.4.3
Functions and PLC jobs
Functions
The following functions can be used to import and export recipe data records for
editing with external tools:
S
Export_Data_Records
S
Import_Data_Records
They can be used to either import and export either individual data records or all
data records in a recipe, according to the configured parameters.
The following functions can be used to transfer data records between the PLC and
operating unit data medium.
S
Data_Record_DAT_to_PLC
S
Data_Record_PLC_to_DAT
The data medium is the internal Flash memory, the memory card or any network
path. Both the recipe and data record must be specified as parameters in which the
values should be written.
The following functions enable data records to be transferred to the PLC which are
currently being displayed in the recipe view on the operating unit.
S
Data_Record_PLC_to_Display
S
Data_Record_Display_to_PLC
The values from the data record tags are written directly to the addresses in the
PLC.
Parameters which can be changed for recipe functions
S
Return values
It is possible to configure the optional Return values parameter for various
recipe functions. This parameter enables a message to be issued concerning
the status of a function. Functions can be processed in succession using
Change value.
Values
2: Function in progress
4: Function completed without errors
12: Function completed with errors
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
6-23
Recipes
Release 12/01
S
Status message
It is possible to configure the Status message parameter for various recipe
functions. This parameter defines whether a corresponding system message
should appear when a function has been completed.
Values
1: After importing the data records, a status message is issued.
0: No status message
PLC jobs
The following two PLC jobs can be used to transfer data records between the PLC
and operating unit automatically:
S
No. 69: “PLC → DAT” (read data record from PLC)
S
No. 70: “DAT → PLC” (write data record in PLC)
Information on PLC jobs is provided in the Communication for Windows-based
Systems User’s Guide.
6.4.4
Import/Export data records
Purpose
When the appropriate features have been configured, data records on the
operating unit can be exported as CSV files to the data medium. This feature can
be used to edit data records with external tools, e.g. with a spreadsheet program or
text editor and import them on the operating unit again.
Condition
In order to export and import data records during runtime, the configuration must
contain the following functions:
S
Export_Data_Records
S
Import_Data_Records
These functions must be linked in the ProTool CS configuration software, e.g. to a
function key or button.
File format CSV
With file format CSV, the table columns (entry name and value) are separated by a
separator (e.g. semicolon). Each table row (entry) is terminated by a line feed.
6-24
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Recipes
Release 12/01
The example in Figure 6-6 (Page 6-11) appears as follows in CSV format for the
individually exported data record Juice:
Orange;Juice
3;2
Var_2;95
Var_3;5
Var_4;0.5
Var_5;100
Additional information is stored in the first two lines:
S
Line 1:
Name of the recipe and data record
S
Line 2:
Number of the recipe and data record
The operating unit interprets the information on importing the file.
Notice
When the CSV files are edited with an external text editor, the modifications are
saved in text format (without control codes).
Export/Import all data records of a recipe or all recipes
When appropriately configured, all the data records in a recipe or all recipes can be
imported/exported together. The example CSV file on Page 6-2 appears as
follows for the export of all data records of a recipe:
Orange;Drink;Juice;Nectar
3;1;2;3
Var_2;90;95;70
Var_3;10;5;30
Var_4;1.5;0.5;1.5
Var_5;200;100;400
Additional information is stored in the first two lines:
S
Line 1:
Name of the recipe and all the configured data records
S
Line 2:
Number of the recipe and all the configured data records
The operating unit interprets the information on importing the file.
In this way, the CSV file can be used, for example, to create new data records by
means of a spreadsheet program (Figure 6-7). After importing the modified file, the
new data records can be used on the operating unit.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
6-25
Recipes
Release 12/01
Figure 6-7
Create data records externally (example: Microsoft Excel)
If all the recipes are exported, a CSV file is created for each recipe.
Exporting, editing and importing data records
Proceed as follows in order to export data records on the operating unit in a CSV
file, edit it using with an external tool (e.g. spreadsheet program or text editor) and
import it back on the operating unit:
Step
1
Export data record
Procedure
S Press the operating element linked with the
Export_Data_Records function (e.g. function key or button).
Either all the data records, only the data record of a recipe
defined in the configuration or all the recipes on the data
medium are exported, according to the configuration.
The data records are exported in the file which was
configured in the parameter File Name in the function
Export_Data_Records.
S Copy the CSV file onto a transferable data medium or in a
directory which can be accessed by the external tool.
2
Edit CSV file
S Carry out the modifications in the CSV file with an external
tool, e.g. Microsoft Excel or a text editor.
S Save the modifications on the data medium.
S Copy the CSV file back to the original directory.
3
Import data
records
S Activate the operating element linked with the
Import_Data_Records function.
The data records are copied in the data storage area
configured for the recipe.
6-26
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Recipes
Release 12/01
Notice
If data records should be exported and the CSV files edited on a different Windows
system using a spreadsheet program (e.g. Microsoft Excel), ensure that the
decimal separator and list separator are identical on the two different systems.
These settings can be modified from the Windows CE Start menu using: Settings
→ Control Panel → Regional Settings on the Numbers tab control (refer to
Page 8-11).
The operating unit is supplied with the German language options set.
6.4.5
Reaction on changing the recipe structure
Standard behavior
The following section describes the standard behavior of the operating unit when it
detects differences between the data record structure stored on the data medium
and the recipe structure currently loaded on the operating unit.
Load and export data records, and write in the PLC
!
S
The data record on the data medium contains additional tags:
The values are rejected.
S
The data record on the data medium contains values which cannot be
converted to the assigned tag type:
The configured start value for the tag is used.
S
Tags are missing in the data record on the data medium:
The configured start value for the tag is used.
Warning
The assignment is lost on changing the tag name.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
6-27
Recipes
Release 12/01
Import data records
S
The imported data record contains additional tags:
The values are rejected.
S
The imported data record contains values which cannot be converted to the
assigned tag type:
The configured start value for the tag is used. This occurs, for example, when
the tag type has been changed in the configuration.
S
Tags are missing in the imported data record:
The configured start value for the tag is used.
Note
Export the data record after changing the recipe structure and check the exported
values. Please observe the related safety notes provided on Page 6-17.
6-28
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Archives
7
Overview
Process data can be archived on the operating unit, i.e. stored permanently and
evaluated.
Different archives are possible depending on the process data stored:
S
Message archives
Message archives are used to store message events from one or more
message categories (e.g. event messages/alarm messages/system messages).
However, each message category can only be assigned to one specific archive.
The message archive can be used, for example, to store login and logout
procedures on the operating unit as system messages. In this way, it is possible
to determine which user is currently logging in on an operating unit at any time.
S
Tag archive
A tag archive contains the values from one or more tags at specific points of
time.
However, each tag can only be assigned to one specific archive.
The properties of an archive, e.g. memory location and archive size, is defined by
the configuration planner in ProTool CS.
Archive file format
Each archive is stored as an individual file. Data is stored in the archive file in CSV
format. This enables archived data to be processed and evaluated using external
tools, e.g. with a spreadsheet program or text editor.
In file format CSV, table columns are separated by a separator (e.g. semicolon).
Each table row is terminated by a line feed.
Notice
When the CSV files are edited with an external text editor, the modifications are
saved in text format (without control codes).
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
7-1
Archives
Release 12/01
Storage location
The memory location for archive files is defined during configuration. Possible
targets are:
S
S
Memory card (PC and/or CF card)
Any path in the network
Caution
The internal FLASH memory is not permissible as the memory location for archive
files because cyclic archiving reduces the service life of the FLASH memory and
thus that of the MP270.
Archive functions
The following functions are available in the ProTool CS configuration software in
order to be able to work with archives on the operating unit:
7-2
S
Open_archive
The connection between the operating unit and all archive files is established.
S
Close_archive
All archive files are closed and the connection between the operating unit and
all archive files is disconnected. A memory card can then be removed or
exchanges without any risks involved. Archive files queued during this time are
puffered, up to a limit of 255 entries.
S
Copy_archive
The content of an archive is copied to another archive. This enables backup
copies of archives to be produced.
S
Start_archive, Stop_archive
Starts or stops the archiving process in the selected archive.
Normally, messages and tags are archived throughout the entire process. The
function can be used to start the archiving to the specified archive by pressing
an operating element on the operating unit and stopped with the Stop_archive
function.
S
Delete_archive
Deletes all the entries in the selected archive.
S
Start_sequence_archive
Switches from the current archive to the following one. If no sequence archive
has been configured, the function is not executed.
S
Archive_tag
Archives the status of a tag in the archive configured for the tag. This function
can be used to trigger the archiving of a tag to the specified archive by pressing
an operating element on the operating unit. The archive must have been started
beforehand.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Archives
Release 12/01
Evaluating message archives
The ProTool settings dialog for message archives provides the option of activating
an extended data storage process. When activated, the message text, including
tags and storage location, are archived. This enables a useful analysis to be made
using external tools.
Note on performance using memory cards
If a network is not used when archiving on the operating unit but an ATA-Flash or
SRAM PC card is used as the archive data medium instead, the archive memory
space available is limited. The archiving performance of a FLASH PC card is also
very limited. FLASH modules cannot be read from or written to in fine tracks, as
opposed to a hard disk. Each access to a FLASH card requires copying large
sectors of the FLASH card which greatly reduces the performance.
For this reason, the operating unit should not be used primarily for the cyclical
archiving of data but rather for archiving non-cyclically occurring fault states (alarm
and event messages).
The operating unit has not been conceived for archiving tasks with more heavy
demands in respect of high quantity structure or performance.
Examples of performance
The table provide examples for the maximum performance possible:
Task
Recording rate [entries per second]
ATA-FLASH/SRAM
25
View of a message archive
(10 messages from 2,000 entries)
15 s
Trend curve display of a tag archive
(300 trend values from 2,000 entries)
5s
Note:
In the case of large archives, reading in and displaying require considerably less
time when several sequence archives are configured rather than one large cyclic
archive. A new sequence archive is recommended following approx. 10,000
entries.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
7-3
Archives
Release 12/01
Deactivate operating unit with memory card inserted
Caution
Always terminate the runtime software before switching off the voltage supply in
order to prevent loss of data.
Operate the operating element linked to the Exit_runtime function in the
configuration. Wait until the operating unit Start menu (Figure 3-1, Page 3-6)
appears and then switch off the power supply.
If the power supply is interrupted inadvertently during normal operation, the
operating unit checks the memory card after power is returned, repairing defect
areas if necessary.
Remove memory card
Caution
Before removing the memory card, either use the operating element linked with
the Close_archive function in the configuration or stop the runtime software.
Operate the operating element linked to the Exit_runtime function in the
configuration.
Closing the archive or terminating the runtime software may take several minutes,
depending on the size and number of the archives stored.
7-4
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
System Settings
8
Overview
The general settings listed below can be modified on the operating unit:
S
Language (Page 8-2)
S
Operating mode (Page 8-3)
S
Settings on Windows CE Control Panel (from Page 8-4)
– Screen settings
– Communication
– Date/Time
– Network
– Unit properties
– Language settings
– Screen keyboard
– Volume (touch feedback)
– Printer
– S7 download settings
– Password
S
Network operation (Page 8-15)
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
8-1
System Settings
8.1
Release 12/01
Set Language
Language-dependent objects
When downloading the configuration from the configuration computer, up to five
languages can be loaded on the operating unit simultaneously. The ASIA language
variants are also supported. It is possible to switch between the languages, online,
at any time and display language-dependent objects (texts and formats) in the
runtime in other languages.
The following are language-dependent, for example
S
Messages
S
Screens
S
Text lists
S
Help texts
S
Date/Time
S
Decimal separating character
S
Static texts
Condition
In order to change languages on the operating unit while it is in operation, the
following conditions must be fulfilled:
S
The editing language must be available on the operating unit. The languages
available during runtime are defined during configuration in ProTool CS under
System → Language Assignment: OP Languages.
S
The Switch_Language function must be linked to an operating element, e.g. to
a button or a selection field.
Change language
Immediately after activating the function, all the language-dependent objects are
displayed in the new language.
Two different types of language change can be configured:
1. Each time the function is activated, the operating unit switches one language
further, cyclically.
2. After activating the function, the language can be explicitly selected.
8-2
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
8.2
System Settings
Setting an Operating Mode
Conditions for changing operating modes
In order to switch the operating unit between the operating modes described
below, the Change_mode function must be linked to an operating element in the
configuration.
Operating modes
It is possible to switch between various operating modes on the operating unit
according to the configuration:
Offline mode
In this mode, there is no logical connection between the operating mode and PLC.
The operating unit can be operated but data cannot be downloaded.
Online mode
When using this mode, processes can be operated and visualized without
restriction. There is a logical connection between the operating unit and PLC or the
operating unit attempts to establish one.
Online mode is the predefined operating mode each time the operating unit is
started up.
Download mode
This operating mode is used to transfer a configuration from the configuration
computer to the operating unit. Further information on download mode is provided
in Chapter 3.4.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
8-3
System Settings
8.3
Release 12/01
Windows CE Control Panel Settings
The Windows CE Control Panel
The following settings can be defined for the system using the Windows CE
Control Panel:
S
Date/Time
S
Network
S
Device properties (e.g. brightness and calibration of touch screens)
S
Language settings
S
Screen saver
S
Screen keyboard
S
Volume (touch feedback)
S
Printer
S
Backup/Restore
S
Transfer (download)
S
UPS (option only)
Open Control Panel
Various settings can be defined after pressing the Control Panel button in the start
menu. It may be necessary to enter a password.
The following possibilities are available with which to open the Control Panel
(Figure 8-1, Page 8-5):
S
During the start-up phase:
Use the Control Panel button in the Start menu to open the Windows CE
Control Panel containing the various options.
S
In normal operation:
– If configured, use the operating element assigned to the Start_Control_Panel
function.
– It is also possible to open the Windows CE Control Panel via the Settings
item in the Windows CE Start menu.
MP 270B Key, OP 270:
Open the Windows CE Start menu with the key combination
depicted
MP 270B Touch, TP 270 :
Press the button depicted twice (locking button) to activate the
toolbar.
8-4
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
System Settings
Release 12/01
Figure 8-1
Windows CE Control Panel with options
Change language settings
!
Caution
Stop the runtime software before modifying the system settings otherwise the
changes, e.g. for downloading, do not take effect.
Proceed as follows to change settings in the Windows CE Control Panel:
Step
Procedure
1
Exit_runtime
Stop the runtime software before starting to change any system settings.
2
Open Control Panel
Open the Control Panel as described on Page 8-4.
3
Change language settings
Change the settings for the system in the Control Panel.
4
Close Control Panel
Close the Control Panel.
MP 270B Touch / TP 270:
Press the button illustrated.
MP 270B Key / OP 270:
Press the Alt key and use the cursor keys to select the menu item Close.
Confirm the selection by pressing the Enter key.
5
Restart runtime
Start the runtime software via the Start menu.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
8-5
System Settings
8.3.1
Release 12/01
Device properties
Purpose
The OP properties option provides the following setting options. These enable, for
example, the screen to be adapted to changing lighting conditions and to optimize
viewing from different angles:
S
Set brightness,
S
Set contrast (OP 270 and TP 270 only),
S
Calibrate touch screen (MP 270B Touch and TP 270 only),
S
Display device data,
S
Backup non-resistant data.
Set brightness
Figure 8-2
OP Properties option, Display
Note
The MP 270B (TFT display) does not support the Contrast function.
Step
8-6
Procedure
1
Open the Display tab control (Figure 8-2) in the OP Properties option.
2
Use the Brightness up and Brightness down buttons to adjust the screen
brightness.
3
In the case of the MP 270B Touch and TP 270, close the setting menu using the
OK button, in the case of the MP 270B Key and OP 270 move the focus to the
tab control heading and press the Enter key.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
System Settings
Release 12/01
In the case of the MP 270B Key and OP 270, the screen brightness can be
changed outside the Windows CE Control Panels by using the following key
combination:
Increases the brightness.
Reduces the brightness.
Set contrast (OP 270 and TP 270 only)
Step
Procedure
1
Open the Display tab control (Figure 8-2) in the OP Properties option.
2
Use the Contrast up and Contrast down buttons to adjust the screen contrast.
3
In the case of the TP 270, close the setting menu using the OK button, in the
case of the OP 270 move the focus to the tab control heading and press the
Enter key.
In the case of the OP 270 and TP 270 (STN display), the screen contrast can be
changes using the following key combination:
Increases the contrast
Reduces the contrast
Note
Wait at least 10 seconds after changing the settings before switching the unit off.
Otherwise, the changes will not be saved.
Calibrate touch screen
Figure 8-3
OP Properties option, Touch tab control
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
8-7
System Settings
Release 12/01
Purpose
Depending on the installation position and viewing angle, it is possible that a more
or less strong parallax may occur when operating the MP 270B Touch or TP 270.
In order to prevent operating errors occurring as a result, the screen can be
calibrated during the start-up phase and normal operation.
Step
Procedure
1
Open the Touch tab control (Figure 8-3, Page 8-7) in the OP Properties option.
2
Press the Recalibrate button to start the calibration process.
Five calibration crosses appear in succession on the screen. Follow the
instructions provided on the screen and touch the respective calibration cross.
3
Apply calibration:
Touch any point of the screen after the calibration process for the new calibration
data to take effect.
Reject calibration:
Wait 30 seconds, until the seconds counter displayed has reached zero, before
rejecting the new calibration data.
If calibration is not performed correctly, the new values are not accepted.
4
Touch the OK button to close the Control Settings menu.
Configured function
When the Touch Calibration function has been linked to an operating element in
the configuration, the touch screen can be calibrated while in normal operation.
The triggering operating element can be configured so that a password must be
entered to enable the touch calibration process.
The calibration process is identical with steps described for the start-up phase 2
and 3.
Persistent storage of registrations
Figure 8-4
8-8
OP Properties option, Persistent Storage tab control
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
System Settings
Release 12/01
Step
Procedure
1
Open the Persistent Storage tab control (Figure 8-2, Page 8-6) in the
OP Properties option.
2
Press the Save Registry button to start the storage process.
3
Press the Save Files button to start the copy the files in the RAM file system to
the Flash memory.
The current registration settings are stored in the Flash memory.
When the system is restarted, the files saved are restored in the file system.
4
In the case of the MP 270B Touch and TP 270, close the setting menu using the
OK button, in the case of the MP 270B Key and OP 270 move the focus to the
tab control heading and press the Enter key.
Display device data
Figure 8-5
Option OP, Device tab control (Example)
Step
8.3.2
Procedure
1
Open the Device tab control (Figure 8-5) in the OP Properties option.
2
Various device data is displayed.
3
In the case of the MP 270B Touch and TP 270, close the setting menu using the
OK button, in the case of the MP 270B Key and OP 270 move the focus to the
tab control heading and press the Enter key.
Screen saver
Figure 8-6
Screensaver
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
8-9
System Settings
Release 12/01
It is possible to define a period of time (in minutes) for automatic activation of the
screen saver on the operating unit. The screen saver settings are defined in the
Screensaver option of the Windows CE Control Panels (refer to Page 8-4).
The screen saver is automatically activated if the operating unit is not operated
within the defined period of time.
Note
When the screen saver is activated, the back-lighting is automatically dimmed.
The screen saver is deactivated on pressing any key or touching the touch screen.
The function assigned to that key/button is not triggered.
On entering the value 0, the screen saver is deactivated permanently.
Dim back-lighting
The brightness of the back-lighting for the screen is reduced with increasing
operational use for technological reasons. In order to increase the service life of
the back-lighting it is also possible to use the Screensaver option in the
Windows CE Control Panel to set the period of time after which the back-lighting
should be dimmed.
The back-lighting is automatically activated if the operating unit is not operated
within the defined period of time.
The back-lighting is automatically deactivated after any key or button is pressed.
The function assigned to that key/button is not triggered.
If the value 0 is set, the back-lighting is deactivated permanently.
8.3.3
Communication
The name of the operating unit can be modified here in order, for example, to
identify it within a network. Further information regarding configuration of the
network operation is provided from Page 8-16.
8.3.4
Set date/time
Enter the values to set the current date and time. The way in which these settings
are modified directly in the active configuration is explained on Page 5-14.
8-10
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
System Settings
Release 12/01
8.3.5
Network
This is used to configure the network properties.
Information concerning configuration of the network operation is provided from
Page 8-16.
8.3.6
Language setting
Language-specific settings can be defined here, e.g.:
S
Date and time format (refer to Page 5-14)
S
Decimal separator and list separator (refer to Page 6-26)
The operating unit is supplied with the German language options set.
8.3.7
Screen keyboard
This is used to define the position and size of the screen keyboard when it appears
on the operating unit. Proceed as follows:
Step
8.3.8
Procedure
1
Select the Input Panel option.
2
Move the screen keyboard to the required position.
3
To change the size, press the Start Resize button.
4
Store the new settings by pressing the Save button.
5
Close the option using the button depicted on the right or with the ESC
key.
Volume
This is used to change the setting for the volume of acoustic signals and operating
acknowledgement. The following items are available after activating the Volume
tab control and selecting the Volume & Sounds option:
S
S
acoustic operating acknowledgement for touch operation,
volume control
The Sounds tab controlis irrelevant for runtime settings.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
8-11
System Settings
8.3.9
Release 12/01
Set printer
A printer can be selected and set up using the Printer option. Some settings are
only relevant for printing a hardcopy of the screen contents and have no influence
on the message logging, e.g. color or quality of graphics printing.
Information on connecting printers is provided on Page 9-15.
Adjustable options
The setting possibilities available are dependent on the printer selected:
S
Printer Language
Select the printer to which the operating unit is connected from the list.
S
Port
Select the port and baud rate used by the operating unit to transfer data to the
printer, e.g. IF2: 9600.
S
Network
If a network has been configured (refer to Page 8-15), enter a path for a
network printer here. Select “Network“ as the port.
S
Paper Size
Select the paper size used in the printer, e.g. A4 or Letter.
S
Draft mode
Define the quality of the printout of graphics. If the option is activated, printout is
performed in draft quality, if deactivated printout is in high quality.
S
Color
When a color printer is connected, this is used to define whether printing should
be in color or black and white.
S
Orientation
Define whether the page should be printed in Portrait) or Landscape)
format.
Note
If a serial printer is connected, the following settings are necessary on the printer:
S RS 232, whereby only the RxD, TxD and GND signals are required (refer
S
S
S
S
S
8-12
to Appendix B),
8 data bits,
1 stop bit,
No parity,
Baud rate between 9600 and 57600, printer-dependent,
XON / XOFF protocol.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
System Settings
Release 12/01
Default settings
When the operating unit is supplied, the following default settings are defined:
S Printer:
EPSON 9 matrix printer
S Port:
IF2
S Baud rate: 9600 bit/s
8.3.10
UPS (only loadable as an option)
Figure 8-7
UPS
To prevent the loss of data in the event of a power failure, e.g. while archiving
process values/messages, a UPS can ensure a controlled shutdown of the
MP 270B. An external Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS detects when the power
supply has failed and reports this to the operating panel via the serial interface.
The UPS driver is installed as an add-on using the ProSave tool. The associated
UPS icon only appears in the Windows CE Control Panel after it has been installed
via ProSave.
It is possible to define how long the power failure may continue without the runtime
being shut down. The driver is suitable for theSITOP DC-USV Module A.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
8-13
System Settings
8.3.11
Release 12/01
System properties
Figure 8-8
System Properties
The System Properties can be used to define the size of the memory for the
DRAM file system (storage memory). It defines how much memory can be used by
the applications. Values can be modified using a slider control. The standard size
of a memory in the DRAM file system for applications is 2 MB.
!
!
8-14
Caution
If too much DRAM file memory is provided, ProTool runtime has too little working
memory available. Therefore, in the case of incorrect settings, there is no
guarantee that the runtime process can run properly.
Caution
The operation of the ProTool runtime together with the Internet Explorer can only
be guaranteed when the runtime either does not use a ProAgent or the
run-capable configuration (*.fwd) is only a maximum of 2 MB.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
System Settings
Release 12/01
8.4
Network Operation
Purpose
The operating units are equipped with an Ethernet interface or can be expanded by
adding an Ethernet card option. In the case of the MP 270B the interface is
installed on-board. In the case of the TP 270 or OP 270, an NE2000-compatible
plug-in board is required.
Implementing the network function enables the operating unit to be used for:
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
archiving data via the network
printing via a network printer
storing recipe data records in the network
exporting recipe data records in the network
importing recipe data records from the network
downloading projects
backing up data
Notice
S The operating unit can only be implemented in TCP/IP networks.
S The operating unit can only access files from other units which have a TCP/IP
server functionality (operating unit only has client functionality). It is not
possible to access operating unit files on a PC connected via Ethernet.
Condition
Within a TCP/IP network, computers are addressed by means of network names.
These network names are translated from a DNS or WINS server to TCP/IP
addresses. Direct addressing via TCP/IP addresses is not currently supported by
the operating system. Therefore, to ensure the functionality of the operating unit in
a TCP/IP network, it is useful to employ a DNS or WINS server. Appropriate
servers are available in common TCP/IP networks. Please contact your network
administrator.
Printing via a network printer
The operating unit’s operating system does not support the direct message logging
via a network printer. All other printer functions, such as hardcopy or shift log, are
possible via the network without restriction.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
8-15
System Settings
8.4.1
Release 12/01
Configuring the operating unit for network operation
Overview
The operating unit must be appropriately configured prior to setting into network
operation. The configuration is basically divided into the following steps:
S
S
S
S
Set computer name of the operating unit
Configure network address
Set login information
Save settings
Preparation
Before beginning with the configuration, request the specific network parameters
from the network administrator. The following information is of particular interest:
S
Does the network use DHCP for dynamic assignment of network addresses? If
not: Instigate the assignment of a new TCP/IP network address for the
operating unit.
S
What is the TCP/IP address of the default gateway?
S
What are the DNS addresses of the name server?
(if DNS is used in the network)
S
Which WINS addresses has the name server?
(if WINS is used in the network)
Procedure
The following instructions describe how to define the general settings step by step.
Additional steps or procedures may be necessary depending on the network
infrastructure.
Step
Procedure
Open Control Panel
1
Open the Control Panel as described on Page 8-4.
Set computer name of the operating unit
2
In order to identify the operating unit within the network, it must be
assigned a unique name (device name) within the network using the
Control Panel option Communication.
Apply the settings and close the dialog by pressing ENTER.
Configure network address
3
Use the Network option to call in the network configuration.
Select an appropriate network driver in the Adapters tab control.
When using operating units with an integrated Ethernet card, use
Onboard LAN, with network cards, normally use the
NE2000-compatible driver.
8-16
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
System Settings
Release 12/01
Step
4
Procedure
Press the Properties button in order to configure the network characteristics of
the network card used.
Complete the dialog according to the network driver selected in Step 3.
If the network implements DHCP, skip Step 5.
5
Select the tab control IP Address then option Specify an IP Address.
Enter the TCP/IP address of the operating unit (e.g. 233.239.2.100), subnet
mask (e.g. 255.255.255.0) and default gateway (e.g. 223.239.2.200).
6
Enter the name server address of the network in the tab control Name Servers.
Close the dialog with ENTER or OK in order to apply the settings.
Set login information
7
In order to login correctly into the network, enter your user permissions in the
Identification tab control. Enter the user name valid for the network or the
network server and the associated password (max. 8 characters).
If the network administrates users via domain controllers, enter the relevant
domain controller name.
Close the dialog with ENTER or OK in order to apply the settings.
Save settings
8.4.2
8
Switch off the operating unit.
9
Before switching the operating unit on, insert the network cable in the
corresponding interface so that a unique IP address can be assigned during
the start-up phase.
10
Switch the operating unit on again.
Test network
Procedure
It is then possible to access the network. To test it, assess the network server via
the Explorer. Proceed as follows:
Step
1
Procedure
Start Explorer via the Windows Start menu.
MP 270B Key / OP 270:
Use the key combination depicted.
MP 270B Touch / TP 270 10”:
Double click on the icon depicted in the screen keyboard.
From the Programs program group, select the Windows Explorer application.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
8-17
System Settings
Release 12/01
Step
2
Procedure
Use the Address input field to enterthe UNC name of the directory/drive
provided on the server.
Example:
The server is called:
The name provided is:
The resulting UNC name is:
3
mrnbg2
daten
\\mrnbg2\daten
After entering the UNC name, press the ENTER key. When all the network
settings are correct, Explorer displays the files located under the directory
provided on the TCP/IP server.
Note
In addition, the network program ipconfig are available in the operating system.
8.4.3
Configure network functions
Condition
Before accessing the network, it must be set up on the operating unit.
Procedure
In order to be able to use the network functions in the ProTool CS configuration
software, it is only necessary to specify the relevant UNC assigned names at those
points where paths have been entered for files or directories.
8-18
S
Example 1: Archives
If, for example, it is necessary to carry out archiving on the server in the
example above (Step 2 in the table on Page 8-18), replace the predefined
archive memory location \Storage Card\ProCSVarc by the UNC assigned name
for the server, i.e. \\mrnbg2\daten\ProCSVarc.
S
Example 2: Recipe data records
In order to store recipe data records in the network, replace the predefined path
name \Flash\ProCSVdata by the UNC assigned name for the server, i.e.
\\mrnbg2\daten\ProCSVarc. The same applies for exporting and importing
recipe data records using the functions Export_Data_Records and
Import_Data_Records. In this case, too, replace the parameter File name with
the UNC assigned name for the server.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Installation
9
In this chapter
This chapter provides information on:
S
installation of the
– MP 270B Key and OP 270 (Page 9-2)
– MP 270B Touch and TP 270 (Page 9-5)
S
electrical connections to
– the power supply (Page 9-9)
– the configuration computer (Page 9-12)
– the PLC (Page 9-13)
– the printer (Page 9-15)
– USB keyboard/mouse/printer (Page 9-16)
9.1
Mechanical Installation
Installation location and conditions
The operating unit is designed for installation in the front panels of cabinets and
consoles. The MP 270B Key and OP 270 10” are also designed for installation in
19” cabinets and racks.
Cut a mounting cut-out in the front panel prior to installation. The thickness of the
front panel must not exceed 6 mm. Additional fixation holes are not necessary due
to the tensioning mechanism used.
Details regarding the installation depth and mounting cut-out are provided on:
S
MP 270B Touch, TP 270 10” and TP 270 6”: Page 10-2.
S
MP 270B Key, OP 270 10” and OP 270 6”: Page 10-6.
Degree of protection
The operating unit must be installed in such a way that at least Protection Class
IP54 is guaranteed. The IP65 degree of protection for the front panel can only be
ensured when the seal on the front plate of the operating unit is fitted correctly.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
9-1
Installation
Release 12/01
Notice
The Protection Classes NEMA 4 and IP65 are only ensured when
S the metal plate of the installation support for the OP 270 6” and TP 270 6” must
be at least 2 mm thick ,
S the metal plate of the installation support for the MP 270B, OP 270 10” and
TP 270 10” must be at least 2.5 mm thick.
!
Caution
S The operating unit must be brought to room temperature before it is started up.
If condensation forms, do not switch the unit on until it isabsolutely dry.
S To prevent the operating unit from overheating during operation,
– the angle of inclination from vertical installation may not exceed a maximum
of $35_.
– do not expose the operating unit to direct sunlight
– ensure that the ventilation slits in the housing remain free after installation.
Notice
The operating unit was function-tested before shipping. If a fault occurs
nevertheless, please enclose a full account of the fault when returning the unit.
9.1.1
Installing the MP 270B Key or OP 270
Before installation
If the labeling of the function keys needs to be modified, replace the labeling strips
before installing the MP 270B Key or OP 270. Information on this is provided on
Page 10-9.
Installing the MP 270B Key or OP 270 10” in 19” cabinets/racks
Use the profiles provided by the respective cabinet or rack manufacturer to install
the unit in a 19” cabinet/rack.
Installation dimensions of standard 19” cabinets:
S Width:
S Height:
Fixing the operating unit:
9-2
19” (482.6 mm)
7 HE (310 mm)
To the profiles using four screws
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Installation
Release 12/01
Installation in front panels
The MP 270B Key and OP 270 can be fixed in the mounting cut-out using
screw-type clamps. When fixing with screw-type clamps, no extra fixation holes are
necessary in the front panel.
Screw-type clamps used in conjunction with an outer seal can achieve Protection
Class IP65. Screwed supports achieve the Protection Class IP54.
Proceed as follows to install the MP 270B Key and OP 270 in the front panel:
Step
1
Procedure
Working from the front, insert the MP 270B Key or OP 270 in the installation
cut-out.
Make sure the unit cannot drop out of the front panel before it has been secured.
2
MP 270B Key, OP 270 10”
Insert the hooks of the ten diecast clamps enclosed in the corresponding
recesses in the housing of the operating unit.
The individual positions are indicated in the figure by means of arrows.
MP 270B Key, OP 270 10”
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
9-3
Installation
Release 12/01
Step
Procedure
OP 270 6”
Insert the hooks of the seven plastic clamps enclosed in the corresponding
recesses in the housing of the operating unit.
The individual positions are indicated in the figure by means of arrows.
OP 270 6”
If necessary, two further plastic clamps can be inserted in the bottom two
recesses to additionally fix the operating unit. These are not part of the material
supplied with the OP 270 6”.
3
Tighten the MP 270B Key or OP 270 10” with a hexagonal socket screw key, the
OP 270 6” with a cross-tip screwdriver, from the rear in the front panel.
Caution
S Make sure the seal is seated correctly against the front panel.
S Do not overtighten the screws to avoid damage.
9-4
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Installation
Release 12/01
9.1.2
Installing the MP 270B Touch and TP 270
Installation in front panels
Proceed as follows to install the MP 270B Touch or TP 270 in the front panel:
Step
1
Procedure
Working from the front, insert the MP 270B Touch or TP 270 in the installation
cut-out.
Make sure the unit cannot drop out of the front panel before it has been secured.
2
MP 270B, TP 270 10”
Insert the hooks of the eight diecast clamps enclosed in the corresponding
recesses in the housing of the operating unit.
The individual positions are indicated in the figure by means of arrows.
Front panel
MP 270B Touch, TP 270 10”
TP 270 6”
Insert the hooks of the four plastic clamps enclosed in the corresponding
recesses in the housing of the operating unit.
The individual positions are indicated in the figure by means of arrows.
Front panel
TP 270 6”
3
Tighten the MP 270B Touch and TP 270 10” with a hexagonal socket screw
key, the TP 270 6” with a cross-tip screwdriver, from the rear in the front panel.
Caution
S Make sure the seal is seated correctly against the front panel.
S Do not overtighten the screws to avoid damage.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
9-5
Installation
9.2
Release 12/01
Electrical Installation
Electrical connections
The operating unit requires electrical connections
S
to the power supply,
S
to the configuration computer (PU or PC),
S
to the PLC,
S
to the printer.
An electrical connection to the PU/PC is only required for downloading the project
data. Following the configuration and test phases, a serial printer can be
connected to the operating unit instead of the configuration computer.
EMC compatible installation
A precondition for error-free operation is an EMC hardware design of the PLC and
the use of interference-proof cables. The guidelines on interference-free design of
the PLCs apply equally to installation of the operating unit.
!
Caution
S Only shielded cables are permitted for all signal connections.
S Screw or lock all plug connections.
S Do not install signal lines in the same cable ducts as power cables.
S Siemens AG refuses to accept liability for malfunctions and damage arising
from use of self-made cables or cables from other manufacturers.
Grounding connection
Connect the grounding connection of the operating unit to the rack ground.
Use the grounding screw provided and a conducting cable with a diameter
of q2.5 mm2.
9-6
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Installation
Release 12/01
Connection elements
Figure 9-1 illustrates the arrangement of the connection elements on the interface
plate on the underside of the unit, using the MP 270B Key as an example. The
interface plate on the MP 270B Touch is identical.
Notice
The TP 270 and OP 270 have no interface for the PC card and Ethernet onboard
connection. For the Ethernet connection, these units require a CF plug-in card.
Figure 9-1
No.
Arrangement of connection elements (example: MP 270B Key)
Name
Usage
PE connection
For connection to cabinet ground
Power supply1)
Connection for power supply (+24 V DC)
Level:
Usage:
Interface IF1B 2)
RS 422/RS 485
(potential free)
PLC, PC, PU
Interface IF1A 2)
RS 232
PLC
Interface IF2 2)
RS 232
PC, PU, printer
Switch 4)
To configure interface IF1B
Battery connection 3)
Connection for optional backup battery
UPS interface 2)
Connection for external keyboard, mouse, etc.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
9-7
Installation
Release 12/01
No.
Name
Usage
Slot B
For compact Flash
Ethernet interface
(MP 270B only)
Connection of a RJ45 Ethernet line.
Slot A
(MP 270B only)
For PC card
1)
Connection pin assignment, refer to Page 9-9
2)
Connection pin assignment, refer to Appendix B
3)
Refer to Page 11-2
4)
Switch settings, refer to Page 9-14
Communication options
Table 9-1 indicates the periphery units with which the operating unit can
communicate.
Table 9-1
Communication options
Device
Interface
SIMATIC S5
S
S PROFIBUS-DP
IF1 A
IF1 B
SIMATIC S7
S MPI
S PROFIBUS-DP
IF1 B
IF1 B
SIMATIC 505
S RS 232
S RS 422/RS 485
IF1 A
IF1 B
Other PLCs
S RS 232
S RS 422/RS 485
IF1 A
IF1 B
Configuration computer
S RS 232
IF2
Printer
S Local printer
S Network printer
S USB printer
S RS 232
S Network
S USB
IF2
Ethernet
USB
AS511 1)
External keyboard/mouse
1)
9-8
Connection
USB
Only via converter cable
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Installation
Release 12/01
Reverse battery protection
Caution
The operating unit is equipped with reverse poling protection.
Proceed as follows when commissioning:
1. Connect the operating unit to the power supply.
2. Switch on the power supply.
If the operating unit does not start up, the connections are probably reversed.
Swap the connections over in this case.
3. When the operating unit has been powered up, connect the configuration
computer or other periphery equipment to it.
Power supply
The power supply for the operating unit is connected at the 2-pin plug connector on
the underside of the unit. Use the 2-pin terminal block supplied for this purpose.
The terminal block is designed for cables with a cross-section not larger than
2.5 mm2.
The figure illustrates the pin assignment of the terminal block.
GND
+ 24 V DC
!
Caution
S When using a 24 V supply, make sure that the extra-low voltage is isolated
safely. Use only power supply units complying with IEC 364-4-41 or
HD 384.04.41 (VDE 0100, Part 410).
S Only use power supply units which meet SELV-PELV standards.
S The supply voltage must be within the specified voltage range. Voltages
outside this range can cause malfunctions.
Please refer to the technical data in Appendix A for information on the power
supply requirements.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
9-9
Installation
9.2.1
Release 12/01
Equipotential
Potential differences
Differences of potential can occur in separate system sections which lead to high
equipotential flows, e.g. when cable screening is applied on both sides and
grounded at two different system parts.
The cause of potential differences may be due to different mains power feed
sources.
!
Warning
Cable screening is not designed for potential equalization. Only use lines provided
for the purpose (e.g. with a 16 mm2 cross-section). When setting up MPI/DP
networks, ensure cables with a sufficient cross-section are used otherwise the
interface hardware may be damaged or even destroyed.
Potential equalization lines
The potential differences must be reduced by the provision of potential equalization
lines so that proper functioning of the electrical components installed is
guaranteed.
When installing potential equalization lines, observe the following points:
9-10
S
The efficiency of the potential equalization is greater the smaller the impedance
of the potential equalization line is.
S
If two system parts are connected by screened signal lines, whose screening is
connected on both sides to the grounding/earthed conductor, the impedance of
the additionally laid potential equalization lines may be maximally 10% of the
screening impedance.
S
The cross-section of a potential equalization line must be dimensioned for the
maximum equalizing current which can flow. Experience has shown that
potential equalization lines with a cross-section of 16 mm2 suffice.
S
Use potential equalization lines made of copper or galvanized steel. Connect
the lines with the ground connection/ground conductor and protect from
corrosion.
S
Lay the potential equalization lines so that the area between the potential
equalization line and signal lines is small (refer to the following diagram).
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Installation
Release 12/01
Figure 9-2
Equipotential
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
9-11
Installation
9.2.2
Release 12/01
Connect configuration computer
Connection configuration
Figure 9-3 illustrates how to connect a configuration computer (PU or PC) to the
operating unit for downloading project data. Standard cables are available for the
connections shown (refer to the ST80 catalog).
PC/PU 7xx
RS 232 1)
IF2
COM
Operating unit
PC/PU 7xx
IF1 B
RS 485
MPI/PROFIBUS-DP
PC/PU 7xx
USB
USB
PC/PU 7xx
Ethernet
1)
RJ45
Operating system update only via RS 232 (refer to Chapter 13)
Figure 9-3
Connection configuration diagram for configuration computer
Notice
Use a host-host USB cable for the connection between operating unit and
configuration computer. Please note that only the USB driver on the ProTool CD
must be installed on the configuration computer. The driver enclosed with the
cable cannot be used for downloading.
9-12
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Installation
Release 12/01
9.2.3
Connect PLC
Connection configuration
Figure 9-4 illustrates the basic connection possibilities between the operating unit
and PLC. Standard cables are available for the connections shown (refer to the
ST80 catalog).
SIMATIC 505
IF1A2)
RS 232
RS 232
(9/25-pin)
RS 422
RS 422
(9-pin)
Operating unit
RS 232
RS 422/RS 485
PLCs of other
manufacturers
IF1B2)
RS 485
SIMATIC S71)
RS 485
3)
PROFIBUS-DP
1)
Use only the approved cables for connection to the SIMATIC S7.
To enable operation using the serial interface, connect either the IF1A (RS 232) or IF1B
(RS 422/485), but not both. The 1F1B interface can be configured by means of the switch
(Page 9-14).
3) Any PROFIBUS-DP bus terminal
2)
Figure 9-4
Connection configuration for PLCs
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
9-13
Installation
Release 12/01
Configure interface IF1B
The IF1B interface can be configured via the switches on the rear side of the
operating unit. In this case, the RTS signal is interchanged for RS 485 and the
RS 422 receive data. By default, the RTS signal is not required by the
communication peer.
The table shows the permissible switch settings.
Communication
Switch Setting
4
MPI/PPI
Operating unit
3
2
1
PLC
ON
Standard cable
No RTS on connector1)
Operating unit
RS 422/RS 485
4
3
2
1
PLC
ON
4
3
2
1
PROFIBUS-DP/MPI
Operating unit
ON
RTS on pin 4 (default)
4
3
2
1
ON
RTS on pin 9 (as PU)
4
3
2
1
PLC
ON
No RTS on connector1)
1) State on delivery
Compressing the internal program memory with SIMATIC S5
!
Warning
With the SIMATIC S5, compression of the internal program memory on the PLC
(PU “Compress” function, integrated FB COMPR) is not permitted when an
operating unit is connected. Compression modifies the absolute addresses of the
blocks in the program memory. Since the operating unit only reads the address list
during startup, it does not detect any address modifications and subsequently
accesses the wrong memory areas.
If compression is inevitable during running operations, the operating unit must be
switched off before compressing.
9-14
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Installation
Release 12/01
9.2.4
Connect printer
Connection configuration
Figure 9-5 illustrates how to connect a serial printer to the operating unit. The
following standards are supported serial printers:
S
compatible with ESC/P, 9-pin ESC/P or ESC/P2 (EPSON)
e.g. EPSON FX850
S
compatible with PCL3 (Hewlett Packard)
HP LaserJet 5M
USB printers can still be used for PCL and Epson9 mode.
Operating unit
Local printer (serial)
RS 232 (cable is printer-specific)
ESC/P, 9-pin ESC/P,
ESC/P2, PCL
IF2
Network printer
Ethernet
ESC/P, 9-pin ESC/P,
ESC/P2, PCL
USB printer
USB
Figure 9-5
ESC/P, 9-pin ESC/P,
ESC/P2, PCL
Printer connection configuration
Information on printer settings is provided on Page 8-12.
Notice
S Only use a cable with braided metal screening grounded at each end for
connecting the operating unit and printer.
S Deactivate the (Page 3-7) Serial Transfer Remote Control option in the
Configuration menu if a serial printer is connected to the operating unit via the
IF2 interface.
S Some printers may require that the ASCII character set used in the
configuration is defined on the printer as well.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
9-15
Installation
Release 12/01
Note
If a serial printer is connected, the following settings are necessary on the printer:
S RS 232, whereby only the RxD, TxD and GND signals are required (refer
to Appendix B),
S 8 data bits,
S 1 stop bit,
S No parity,
S Baud rate between 9600 and 57600, printer-dependent,
S XON / XOFF protocol.
9.2.5
Connect external keyboard and mouse
Connection configuration
Figure 9-6 illustrates alternative methods of connecting a keyboard, mouse or
external printer to the operating unit’s USB interface. A keyboard or mouse can be
connected and disconnected during normal operation.
Operating unit
USB standard keyboard
USB standard mouse
USB
USB printer
Figure 9-6
9-16
Connection configuration for external keyboard, mouse and printer
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Installation
Release 12/01
Notice
Use a standard mouse and keyboard with a USA/International keyboard layout.
Commercially available USB units do not normally fulfill higher industrial demands
with regard to resistance to interference which can cause negative effects on the
unit.
The power consumption must not exceed 500 mA with the USB units connected.
9.2.6
Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Connection configuration
Figure 9-7 illustrates the way to connect an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to
the operating unit.
Operating unit
RS 232 1)
IF2
UPS
24 V
1) Only
for UPS with serial connection
Figure 9-7
Connection configuration for UPS
A serial connection is only necessary when using SITOP DC-USV Module A. The
driver for detecting and configuring the UPS (Chapter 8.3.10) is contained on the
ProTool CD and must be installed on the operating unit using ProSave.
UPS without a serial connection can supply a digital signal in the case of a power
failure in the connected PLC. In turn, the PLC program can then inform the
operating unit that the runtime will be shut down. To do this, the PLC modifies a
tag on which the Exit_runtime function is configured in ProTool.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
9-17
Installation
9-18
Release 12/01
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Dimensions
10
In this chapter
This chapter provides information on:
S
Dimensions of the MP 270B Touch and TP 270 10” (Page 10-2),
S
Dimensions of the TP 270 6” (Page 10-4),
S
Dimensions of the MP 270B Key and OP 270 10” (Page 10-6),
S
Dimensions of the OP 270 6” (Page 10-8),
S
Labeling strips for MP 270B Key, OP 270 10” and OP 270 6” (Page 10-9).
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
10-1
Dimensions
10.1
Release 12/01
MP 270B Touch, TP 270 10”
Installation cut-out
For installation in the front panel, the MP 270B Touch or TP 270 10” requires an
installation cut-out (WxH) of 310 +1 mm x 248 +1 mm. The thickness of the front
panel must not exceed 6 mm.
The two units only differ in the inscriptions
(MP 270B Touch = SIMATIC MULTI PANEL, TP 270 10” = SIMATIC PANEL).
Unit dimensions
(59.2)
54.9
9.5
247
275
335
309
Figure 10-1
10-2
Dimensions of the MP 270B Touch and TP 270 10”
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Dimensions
Notice
The following free space must be maintained following installation:
S 100 mm above the unit,
S 50 mm below the unit,
S 15 mm at the sides of the unit.
When using plug-in boards, ensure sufficient space is provided to insert or remove
them.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
10-3
Dimensions
10.2
Release 12/01
TP 270 6”
Installation cut-out
For installation in the front panel, the TP 270 6” requires an installation cut-out
(WxH) of 198 +1 mm x 142 +1 mm. The thickness of the front panel must not
exceed 6 mm.
Unit dimensions
212
6.2
140
156
58
196
Figure 10-2
10-4
Dimensions of the TP 270 6”
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Dimensions
Notice
The following free space must be maintained following installation:
S 150 mm above the unit,
S 100 mm below the unit,
S 15 mm at the sides of the unit.
When using plug-in boards, ensure sufficient space is provided to insert or remove
them.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
10-5
Dimensions
10.3
Release 12/01
MP 270B Key, OP 270 10”
Installation cut-out
For installation in the front panel, the MP 270B Key or OP 270 10” requires an
installation cut-out (WxH) of 436 +1 mm x 295 +1 mm. The thickness of the front
panel must not exceed 6 mm.
The two units only differ in their inscriptions
(MP 270B Key = SIMATIC MULTI PANEL, OP 270 10” = SIMATIC PANEL).
Unit dimensions
(58.6)
482.6
9.5
288.3
310.3
55.3
431.6
Figure 10-3
10-6
Dimensions of the MP 270B Key and OP 270 10”
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Dimensions
Notice
The following free space must be maintained following installation:
S 50 mm above the unit,
S 15 mm below the unit,
S 15 mm at the sides of the unit.
When using plug-in boards, ensure sufficient space is provided to insert or remove
them.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
10-7
Dimensions
10.4
Release 12/01
OP 270 6”
Installation cut-out
For installation in the front panel, the OP 270 6” requires an installation cut-out
(WxH) of 282 +1 mm x 178 +1 mm. The thickness of the front panel must not
exceed 6 mm.
Unit dimensions
59
6
176
204
308
280
Figure 10-4
10-8
Dimensions of the OP 270 6”
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Dimensions
Release 12/01
Notice
The following free space must be maintained following installation:
S 100 mm above the unit,
S 50 mm below the unit,
S 15 mm at the sides of the unit.
When using plug-in boards, ensure sufficient space is provided to insert or remove
them.
10.5
Function Key Labeling for MP 270B Key or OP 270
Labeling
The function keys on the MP 270B Key and OP 270 are labeled as followed on
supply:
S
S
F1 to F20 and K1 to K16 for the MP 270B Key and OP 270 10”
F1 to F14 and K1 to K10 for the OP 270 6”
Ten labeling strips have been inserted from the rear of the unit for the function
keys on the MP 270B Key and OP 270 10”, and eight for the function keys on the
OP 270 6”. These strips can be used in order to label the operating unit specifically
for the system.
Exchange labeling strips
!
Warning
When the cabinet is opened, certain parts of the system that may conduct
hazardous voltage are exposed.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
10-9
Dimensions
Release 12/01
Proceed as follows:
Step
Procedure
1
Place the unit down with the front plate at the bottom.
2
Remove the labeling strips already inserted.
3
Insert the newly labeled strips in the slots in the front plate with the inscription
facing down. The individual positions are indicated in the figure by means of
arrows.
Caution
Before inserting the strips, wait until the inscription is dry. A keyboard foil which is
dirty on the inside cannot be cleaned and can only be replaced at the
manufacturer’s factory.
MP 270B Key / OP 270 10”
OP 270 6”
10-10
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Dimensions
Release 12/01
Create labeling strips
Only use transparent foil to create your own labeling strips so that the LEDs in the
function keys remain visible. Label the foil either with a printer or a waterproof
felt-tip pen. Cut the strips according to the specifications depicted in Figure 10-5.
MP 270B Key / OP 270 10”
8 . 50
2.85
0
2.45
8.50
0
8.50
LED–Fenster.
LED
window,
transparent
transparent
25.69
31.7 4
24.95
31.00
93.15 mm
R0.5
8.50
2.85
47.45
53.50
48.93
54.98
72.17
78.22
95.41
101.46
248.90 mm
17.00
118.65
124.70
17.00
Figure 10-5
Labeling strip dimensions MP 270B Key and OP 270 10”
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
10-11
Dimensions
Release 12/01
OP 270 6”
2.60
0
2.75
0
8.25
8.25
LED window,
20.73
LED–
Fenster. transparent
transparent
26.23
22.25
67.00 mm
R0.5
8.00
8.00
2.60
27.75
38.71
44.21
56.69
163.70 mm
62.19
16.00 mm
99.45
104.95
118.95
124.45
16.00 mm
Figure 10-6
Labeling strip dimensions for OP 270 6”
File
The ProTool CS configuration software contains formatted patterns for labeling
function keys individually for various SIMATIC operating units. The patterns for the
MP 270B Key or OP 270 are stored on the ProTool installations CD under
\UTILITY\SLIDE270.DOC or SLIDE270_6.DOC in Word format. This enables
labeling strips to be created for the keyboard unit without extensive design and
printing operations.
10-12
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
11
Options
In this chapter
This chapter provides information on the options available with which to retrofit the
operating unit.
The following hardware options are available:
S
Backup battery (Page 11-2)
S
CF card (Page 11-4)
S
PC card (MP 270B only) (Page 11-4)
The following software option is available:
S
Internet Explorer (Page 11-6)
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
11-1
Options
Release 12/01
11.1
Hardware Options
11.1.1
Backup battery
Backup battery function
The battery ensures that the internal hardware clock of the operating unit continues
to run even when the power supply is interrupted. The clock is buffered for approx.
3 days if no battery is provided 1).
The battery is not part of the material supplied with the operating unit.
Installation in the MP 270B, TP 270 10” or OP 270 10”
Step
Procedure
1
Secure the new battery by means of two cable ties on the rear side
of the operating unit. The respective location in the individual units is
indicated in the following diagrams by means of arrows.
MP 270B Key /
OP 270 10”
MP 270B Touch / TP 270 10”
2
Insert the battery power feed connector in the two–pin connector
strip (Position 7 in Figure 9-1 on Page 9-7). The connector is coded
and thus protected against polarity reversal.
1) The MP 270B, TP 270 or OP 270 must have been in operation for approx. 6–8 hours
without any interruptions beforehand.
11-2
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Options
Release 12/01
Installation in the TP 270 6” and OP 270 6”
Step
1
Procedure
Secure the new battery by means of a cable tie on the rear side of
the operating unit. The respective location in the individual units is
indicated in the following diagrams by means of arrows.
OP 270 6”
TP 270 6”
2
Insert the battery power feed connector in the two–pin connector
strip (Position 7 in Figure 9-1 on Page 9-7). The connector is coded
and thus protected against polarity reversal.
Further information
Information concerning replacing the battery, supply source and related safety
notes on handling and disposing of the batteries is provided from Page 12-3.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
11-3
Options
11.1.2
Release 12/01
PC card / CF card
Purpose
Two slots are provided, namely Slot A and Slot B (Figure 11-1) located on the rear
side of the MP 270B in which to insert changeable PC cards and Compact Flash
cards. These are not part of the material supplied.
The TP 270 and OP 270 only have one slot for Compact Flash cards
(namely Slot B).
The interchangeable memory cards can be used, for example, to archive important
process data or execute a backup/restore of the internal Flash memory (refer to
Page 3-13).
Slot A
Figure 11-1
Slot B
Position of the slots (exemplified on the MP 270B Key)
Cards supported
The operating unit supports the use of all standard cards which operate with a
programming voltage of 5 V:
11-4
S
Slot A (PC card) (type I and II): (MP 270B only)
– ATA Flash card
– SRAM card
– NE2000-compatible Ethernet card
S
Slot B (Compact Flash Card) (type I):
– ATA Flash card
– NE2000-compatible Ethernet card
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Options
Caution
The current limit is 300 mA per slot.
Remove memory card
Caution
Before removing a memory card, ensure that the operating unit does not access
the card during the removal process.
Before removing the memory card, either use the operating element linked with the
Close_archive function in the configuration or stop the runtime software. Operate
the operating element linked to the Exit_runtime function in the configuration. Wait
until the operating unit Start menu (Figure 3-1, Page 3-6) is displayed. This may
take several minutes, depending on the size and number of archives stored.
Switch operating unit off with memory card inserted
Caution
Always terminate the runtime software before switching off the voltage supply in
order to prevent loss of data.
To terminate the runtime software, press the operating element assigned the
Exit_runtime function in the configuration. Wait until the operating unit Start menu
(Figure 3-1, Page 3-6) appears and then switch off the power supply. Changeover
to the Start menu may take several minutes depending on the size and number of
archives stored.
If the power supply is interrupted inadvertently during normal operation, the
operating unit checks the memory card after power is returned, repairing defect
areas if necessary.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
11-5
Options
Release 12/01
11.2
Software Option
11.2.1
Internet Explorer
The Internet Explorer supplied concerns an Explorer which has been especially
adapted to the Windows CE operating system with a restricted functional scope
(Pocket Internet Explorer). Only small HTML pages, not larger than 100 kb, are
basically suitable to be displayed.
Prior to installation, 4.5 MB memory must be set up for the DRAM file system via
the control panel (Ch 8.3.11).
Caution
If too much DRAM file system capacity is provided, ProTool runtime has too little
working memory available. Therefore, in the case of incorrect settings, there is no
guarantee that the runtime process can run properly.
Caution
The operation of the ProTool runtime together with the Internet Explorer can only
be guaranteed when the run–capable configuration (*.fwd) is only a maximum of
2 MB.
Installation of the Internet Explorer is performed using the ProSave service tool
(refer to Chapter 3.11).
Files created in Internet Explorer (e.g. Favorites) are stored in the DRAM file
system. The DRAM file system is deleted when the unit is switched off. Using the
system settings (OP Properties → Persistent Storage → Save Files, refer to
Ch. 8.3.1), however, it is possible to save the data currently available in the DRAM
file system in the Flash memory. When the unit is started up, the data saved is
automatically restored.
In the case of deinstallation of the Internet Explorers, the files created from Internet
Explorer must also be deleted. To do this, delete the files in the DRAM file system
using the standard Explorer. Then backup the DRAM file system (OP Properties →
Persistent Storage → Save Files, refer to Chapter 8.3.1).
The size of the DRAM file system must be reset to the default value of 2 MB.
Note
By exchanging the operating system (Chapter 13) the initial operating unit
configuration can be restored simply.
11-6
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Maintenance/Upkeep
12
Scope
The operating unit has been designed for low maintenance operation. Maintenance
is limited to:
S
regular cleaning of the screen,
S
regular cleaning of the keyboard foil (MP 270B Key or OP 270),
S
changing the optional backup battery.
12.1
Clean Screen/Keyboard
12.1.1
General notes
Preparation
Clean the unit screens at regular intervals and, in the case of the MP 270B Key or
OP 270, the keyboard foil. Use a damp cloth.
!
Caution
Do not clean the unit while it is turned on. This ensures that functions are not
inadvertently triggered on touching the keys or the touch screen.
Cleaning agents
Only use water and washing-up liquid or a screen cleaning foam to dampen
cleaning cloths. Do not spray the cleaning agents directly on the screen but on the
cleaning cloth. Never use aggressive solvents or scouring powder.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
12-1
Maintenance/Upkeep
12.1.2
Release 12/01
Notes on the touch panel units MP 270B Touch and TP 270
Clean screen
If the Clean Screen function has been assigned to an operating element in the
configuration, the screen can be cleaned while it is turned on. After the Clean
Screen function has been started, all input via the touch screen is deactivated for a
defined period of time. The remaining time is indicated by a bar graph.
Protective foil
A protective foil is available for the MP 270B Touch and TP 270 (refer to ST80
catalog). The protective foil is not part of the material supplied with the units.
The self-adhesive foil prevents the screen being scratched and soiled. In addition,
the matt surface of the foil reduces reflections.
The protective foil can be removed as necessary without leaving any adhesive
residue on the screen.
Caution
Never use sharp or pointed tools to remove the protective foil, such as a knife for
instance. This may cause damage to the touch screen.
12-2
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Maintenance/Upkeep
Release 12/01
12.2
Replacing the Optional Backup Battery
Backup battery function
An optional backup battery is available for the operating units (refer to Chapter 11).
The battery ensures that the internal hardware clock continues to run even when
the power supply is interrupted.
Under normal operating conditions, the battery has a service life of approx. 4
years. It is not part of the material supplied with the operating unit.
Supply source
The battery can be ordered from the Siemens spare parts service. It is shipped
ready for installation with a lead and connector. Please refer to our catalog ST80
for the order number.
Before replacing
Observe the following safety notes before changing the battery:
!
Caution
S
Change the battery while power is still being supplied to ensure the internal
hardware clock continues to run.
S
The battery must be changed by a properly qualified person.
S
Before replacing the battery, refer to the ESD Guidelines in Appendix D.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
12-3
Maintenance/Upkeep
Release 12/01
Procedure
Step
Procedure
1
Unplug the battery cable connector from the two-pin socket in the
operating unit (Position 7 in Figure 9-1 on Page 9-7).
2
The battery is normally secured to the rear side of the MP 270B,
TP 270 10” and OP 270 10” by two cable ties and to the TP 270 6”
and OP 270 6” with one cable tie. Cut the cable ties, using pliers for
instance, and remove the empty battery.
3
Secure the new battery to the rear side of the MP 270B, TP 270 10”
and OP 270 10” with two cable ties and to the TP 270 6” and
OP 270 6” one cable tie.
4
Insert the battery lead connector back into the socket. The
connector is coded and thus protected against polarity reversal.
General notes
Please observe the following safety notes to ensure correct handling and disposal
of lithium batteries:
!
Warning
S
If the lithium battery is not handled properly, there is a risk of explosion.
S
Batteries
– should never be charged
– should not be opened
– should not be short-circuited
– should be safeguarded against polarity reversal
– should not be exposed to temperatures in excess of 100°C
– should be protected against direct sunlight
12-4
S
Do not allow condensation to form on batteries.
S
Should shipping become necessary, ensure compliance with the Dangerous
Chemicals Ordinance for the carrier concerned (coding obligation).
S
Treat used lithium batteries as special waste. Pack them in separate leakproof
plastic bags to dispose of them.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Operating System Update
13
Purpose
If there is a conflict between the configuration software version and current
operating system on the operating unit, downloading of a configuration from the
configuration computer to the operating unit is terminated and a compatibility
conflict is indicated.
In this case, synchronize the operating unit operating system with the version of
the SIMATIC ProTool CS configuration software.
Notice
When the operating system is updated, all the existing data on the operating
system is deleted, including licenses (authorizations) (see Chap. 3.10), applications
(see Chap. 3.11), passwords (see Chap. 5.17) and recipes (see Chap. 6)!
Note
The operating system update is only possible using a serial cable.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
13-1
Operating System Update
Release 12/01
Operating system update using PtUpdate
Proceed as follows in order to adapt the operating system on the operating unit to
the configuration software version used:
Step
Procedure
1
Switch off the operating unit’s power supply .
2
Connect the IF2 (serial) interface on the operating unit to a serial interface on the
configuration computer via a serial zero modem cable.
3
Start the PTUpdate utility program on the configuration computer. It is contained
on the configuration software installation CD. It is located in the \Images
directory, in subdirectory \OP_TP270_MP270B.
4
Select menu item File → Open and open the image file (file extension .img)
appropriate for the operating unit. The image files are located in the same
directory as the PTUpdate utility program.
When the image file has been opened successfully, various information related
to the version status appears on the screen.
5
Select the menu item File → Settings. Set the interface and applicable baud rate
(max. 115200) on the designated interface for the download.
6
Start downloading with the menu option File → Download. When the appropriate
message appears on the screen, switch on the power supply for the operating
system.
When downloading is performed successfully, there is no project data on the
operating unit. The behavior of the operating unit when no configuration has been
loaded is described in Chapter 3.1.
Note
When the operating unit is switched on following an operating system update, it
needs several minutes before the startup routine is completed.
13-2
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
APPENDIX
A
Technical Data
B
Interface Assignments
C
HMI System Messages
D
ESD Guidelines
APPENDIX
M-2
Release 12/01
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Technical Data
A
In this Appendix
This Appendix contains the following technical data for the operating unit:
S
Housing
S
Processor
S
Memory
S
Software
S
Display
S
Keyboard (MP 270B Key, OP 270)
S
Acoustic acknowledgement
S
Power supply
S
Backup battery (option)
S
Network connection
S
Ambient conditions
S
Noise immunity / Noise transmission
S
Approvals
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
A-1
Technical Data
Release 12/01
Housing
MP 270B Key /
OP 270 10”
External dimensions
(W x H) in mm
483 x 310
335 x 275
308 x 204
Installation cut–out
(B x H) in mm
436+1 x 295+1
310+1 x 248+1
282+1 x 178+1 198+1 x 142+1
Mounting depth
55 mm
59 mm
Degree of protection
S Front panel
MP 270B
Touch /
TP 270 10”
OP 270 6”
TP 270 6”
212 x 156
IP65/NEMA 4x Indoor/NEMA 12
S Rear panel
IP20
Weight
Approx. 6 kg
Approx. 4 kg
Approx. 1 kg
Processor
Type
64 bit RISC CPU
Memory
MP 270B
Configuration memory
4 MByte
OP 270 /
TP 270
2 MByte
Storage media
S Slot for Compact Flash card
S Expansion slot for PC card
E.g. ATA Flash card
e.g.
S ATA Flash card
S SRAM cards
S NE 2000 compatible
Ethernet card
–
Software
Operating system environment
A-2
MS Windows CE
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Technical Data
Release 12/01
Color display
Type
MP 270B
Key
TFT LCD
Active screen diagonal
Resolution (pixels)
MP 270B
Touch
OP 270 10”/
OP 270 6”
TP 270 10” /
TP 270 6”
TFT LCD
with touch
panel
CSTN LCD
CSTN LCD
with touch panel
10.4’’ / 5.7“
10.4’’ / 5.7”
10.4’’
640 × 480 (VGA)
640 × 480 (VGA) /
320 x 240 (QVGA)
Possible colors
Back-lighting
Half Brightness Life 1)
256
CCFL tube
60,000 h /
40,000 h
50,000 h
Keyboard
MP 270B Key /
OP 270 10”
Type
System keys with dedicated functions
60,000 h /
40,000 h
OP 270 6”
Membrane keyboard
38 (3 with LEDs)
36 (3 with LEDs)
36 (28 with LEDs)
24 (18 with LEDs)
20
14
Configurable function keys
S Number
S Those usable as softkeys
S Labeling
System-specific with labeling strips
Acoustic acknowledgement
MP 270B Touch / TP 270
In the case of touch operation
y (can be disabled)
Power supply
OP 270 6” / TP 270 6”
Rated voltage
+ 24 V DC
Permissible voltage range
+18.0...+30.0 V DC
Max. permissible transients
35 V (500 msec)
Time between two transients
50 sec minimum
Power consumption
S Typical
MP 270B /
OP 270 10” /
TP 270 10”
Approx. 0.6 A
Approx. 0.9 A
S Max. constant current
S Switch-on current I2t
Approx. 0.9 A
Approx. 1.0 A
Fuse, internal
Electronic
Approx. 0.5
A2s
Approx. 0.5 A2s
1) Time period after which the brightness of the lighting tube only achieves 50 % of its
original value. The specified value is dependent on the operating temperature.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
A-3
Technical Data
Release 12/01
Backup battery (option)
Type
Lithium battery (Sonnenschein SL2361)
Voltage/Capacity
2)
3.6 V/approx. 1.5 Ah
Service life
Approx. 4 years
2) Technical details subject to change without notice.
Network connection
MP 270B
1 × Ethernet (10/100 Mbit)
Type
OP 270 / TP 270
Optional via the
NE 2000-compatible Ethernet
card
Ambient conditions
OP 270 6” / TP 270 6”
Location
vertical
vertical
"35°
"35°
0...+50 °C
0...+50 °C
0...+35 °C
0...+40 °C
–20...+60 °C
–20...+60 °C
Max. permissible angle of inclination
without external ventilation
MP 270B /
OP 270 10” /
TP 270 10”
Max. permissible ambient temperature
S Operation
–
Vertical installation
–
S
Installation angled from the
perpendicular to max. 35°
Shipping, storage
Shock loading
S Operation
15 g/30 msec
S Shipping, storage
Vibration
S Operation
25 g/6 msec
0.075 mm (10 – 58 Hz)
1 g (58 – 150 Hz)
S Shipping, storage
3.5 mm (5 – 9 Hz)
1 g (9 – 500 Hz)
Barometric pressure
S Operation
S Shipping, storage
Ambient conditions
Relative humidity
Operation, transport, storage
A-4
795...1080 hPa
660...1080 hPa
MP 270B Key /
OP 270
Max. 90%, no
condensation
MP 270B Touch /
TP 270
Max. 85%, no
condensation
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Technical Data
Release 12/01
Compliance of the named products with the regulations of Directive 89/336 EEC is
verified by conformance with the following standards:
Noise immunity
Static discharge
(contact discharge/air discharge)
EN 61000-4-2
RF irradiation
EN 61000-4-3
6 kV/8 kV
10 V/m, 80% AM,
1 kHz
Pulse modulation
EN 61000-4-3
900 MHz/1.89 GHz "5 MHz
10 V/meff.,50% ED, 200 Hz
RF conduction
EN 61000-4-6
150 kHz - 80 MHz
10 V, 80% AM, 1 kHz
Burst interference
S Supply lines
S Process data lines
S Signal lines
Surge connection
S Supply line
EN 61000-4-4
2 kV
2 kV
1 kV
EN 61000-4-5
1 kV with converter
2 kV with converter
Magnetic fields
EN 61000-4-8
30A/m 50/60 Hz
Radio interference
Radio interference level complying to
EN 55011
Class A
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
A-5
Technical Data
Release 12/01
The following approvals have been applied for or already granted on supply.
Please refer to the identification on rating plate on the rear of the unit for the
current technical status.
Approvals
UL Recognition Mark 3)
UL approval
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) complying with Standard UL 508,
File E 116536
UL approval
In accordance with the UL/CSA Approval Agreement
FM Approval
FM Approval
Complying with Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number
3611 Hazardous (classified) Locations Class I,
Division 2, Group A, B, C, D
Warning:
!
Personal injury and equipment damage can occur.
Personal injury and equipment damage can occur in
hazardous areas if a plug connection is disconnected
from the operating unit while the system is running.
In hazardous areas, always switch off the power supply
to the operating unit before disconnecting plugs.
Warning:
!
DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE CIRCUIT IS LIVE
UNLESS LOCATION IS KNOWN TO BE NONHAZARDOUS.
3) The UL and CSA file numbers are dependent on the production site. The numbers
specified here changes according to the change of production site.
A-6
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
B
Interface Assignments
IF1A
Table B-1
5
9
9-pin Sub-D plug (pin)
1
6
Pin
RS 232
1
–
2
RXD
3
TXD
4
–
5
GND
6
–
7
RTS
8
CTS
9
–
IF1B
Table B-2
5
Pin
9
9-pin Sub-D socket (configuration via switch, see Page 9-14)
1
6
RS422
RS485 / PROFIBUS-DP / MPI
1
N. c.
2
N. c.
3
TxD+
Data B
4
RxD+
RTS-AS
5
GND (floating)
6
+5 V (floating)
7
N. c.
8
TxD–
Data A
9
RxD–
–
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
B-1
Interface Assignments
Release 12/01
IF2
Table B-3
5
9-pin Sub-D plug (pin)
1
9
6
Pin
RS232
1
DCD
2
RxD
3
TxD
4
DTR
5
GND
6
DSR
7
RTS
8
CTS
9
RI
Ethernet interface
Table B-4
1
RJ45 plug connection
Pin
RJ45
1
10BaseT: TX+
2
10BaseT: TX–
3
10BaseT: RX+
4
–
5
–
6
10BaseT: RX–
7
–
8
–
USB interface
Table B-5
1
B-2
USB standard plug
Pin
USB
1
+5V
2
+5V
3
USB-DM
4
USB-DP
5
0V
6
0V
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
C
HMI System Messages
In this chapter
This chapter contains a selection of important HMI system messages for
Windows-based systems. The table indicates when the messages occur and how
they, or their cause, can be cleared. Not every message is relevant for each
operating unit.
HMI system message parameters
The HMI system messages may contain parameters which are not decoded for the
user but which are relevant in respect of the cause of an error since they provide a
reference to the source code of the runtime software. These parameters are
issued according to the text “Error code:”.
Notice
HMI system messages are issued in the language currently set on the operating
unit.
Number
10000
Effect/Cause
Remedy
The print job could not be started or was
terminated for an unknown reason.
Check the printer settings and cable
connections.
The printer is incorrectly configured.
Or: There are no rights for a network printer
available.
If a fault occurs repeatedly, contact the
hotline.
10001
No printer has been installed or no standard
printer configured.
Install a printer and/or mark one as standard
printer.
10002
The intermediate buffer for printing graphics
is full. Up to two graphics can be buffered.
Do not issue print jobs so quickly in
succession.
10003
Graphics can be buffered again.
–
10004
The intermediate buffer for printing lines in
text mode (e.g. messages) is full. Up to 1000
lines can be buffered.
Do not issue print jobs so quickly in
succession.
10005
Lines of text can be buffered again.
–
10006
The Windows print system reports an error.
Repeat the action, if necessary.
For information on the cause, refer to the text
printed and, if available, the error number.
Printing is not performed or it is incorrect.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
C-1
HMI System Messages
Number
20010
Release 12/01
Effect/Cause
A fault has occurred in the script line called
in from the specified script. Execution of the
script function was, therefore, terminated.
In this case, it is advisable to check any
previous system messages too.
20011
An error has occurred in a script called in by
the script specified. Execution of the script
function- has, therefore, been terminated in
the subscript.
In this case, it is advisable to check any
previous system messages too.
Remedy
Select the specified script line in the
configuration.
Check tags, whether the types used are
permissible.
Check Functions, whether the number and
types of parameter are correct.
Select the scripts from the configuration
which are called in directly or indirectly via
the specified script.
Check tags, whether the types used are
permissible.
Check Functions, whether the number and
types of parameter are correct.
20012
Inconsistent configuration data is present.
Therefore, the script could not be created.
Compile the configuration again.
20013
VBScript.dll is not correctly installed.
Therefore, no scripts can be executed.
Re-install ProTool/Pro RT.
20014
A value is returned by the script function
which is not written in any configured return
tag.
Select the specified script in the
configuration.
Too many scripts have been triggered in
quick succession.
If more than 20 scripts are queued to be
processed, any subsequent scripts are
rejected.
In this case, the script indicated in the
message is not executed.
Check where the scripts are being triggered
from.
30010
The tag could not accept the function result,
e.g. in the case of exceeding the value
range.
Check the tag type of the function
parameter.
30011
A function could not be executed because
Check the parameter value and tag type of
the function was assigned an invalid value or the invalid parameter.
type in the parameter.
If a tag is used as a parameter, check its
value.
40010
The function could not be executed since the Check the parameter types in the
parameters could not be converted to a
configuration.
common tag type.
40011
The function could not be executed since the Check the parameter types in the
parameters could not be converted to a
configuration.
common tag type.
50000
The operating unit receives data faster than
it is capable of processing. Therefore, no
further data is received until the data
currently available has been processed.
Data exchange then resumes.
–
50001
Data exchange has been resumed.
–
20015
C-2
Check whether the script name has been
assigned a value.
Extend the times, e.g. the polling time of the
tags, which trigger the scripts.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
HMI System Messages
Release 12/01
Number
Effect/Cause
Remedy
60000
This message is generated by the function
“Display system messages”. The text to be
displayed is transferred to the function as a
parameter.
–
60010
The file could not be copied in the direction
defined because one of the two files is
currently open or the source/target path is
not available.
Restart the function or check the paths of the
source/target files.
It is possible that the Windows NT user has
no access rights to one of the two files.
60011
Using Windows NT with NTFS: The user
executing ProTool/Pro RT must be granted
access rights for the files.
An attempt was made to copy a file to itself.
Check the path of the source/target file.
It is possible that the Windows NT user has
no access rights to one of the two files.
Using Windows NT with NTFS: The user
executing ProTool/Pro RT must be granted
access rights for the files.
70010
The application could not be started
because it could not be found in the path
specified or insufficient memory space was
available.
Check whether the application exists in the
specified path or close other applications.
70011
The system time could not be modified. The
error message only appears in connection
with area pointer Date/Time PLC. Possible
causes:
Check the time which is to be set.
S an impermissible time was transferred in
Under Windows NT: The user executing
ProTool/Pro RT must be assigned the rights
to modify the system time from Windows NT
(administration/user manager, guidelines).
the PLC job,
S the Windows NT user has no user rights
to modify the system time.
If the first parameter in the system message
is displayed with the value 13, the second
parameter indicates the byte containing the
incorrect value.
70012
An error occurred when executing the
function Exit Runtime with the option Exit
also Windows.
Terminate all applications currently running.
Then terminate Windows.
Windows and ProTool/Pro RT are not
terminated.
A possible cause is that other applications
cannot be terminated.
70013
The system time could not be modified
because an invalid value was entered.
Incorrect separators may have been used.
Check the time which is to be set.
70014
The system time could not be modified.
Possible causes:
Check the time which is to be set.
S an impermissible time was transferred
S the Windows NT user has no user rights
to modify the system time,
Under Windows NT: The user executing
ProTool/Pro RT must be assigned the rights
to modify the system time from Windows NT
(administration/user manager, guidelines).
S Windows rejects the setting request.
70015
The system time could not be read because
Windows rejects the reading function.
–
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
C-3
HMI System Messages
Number
70016
Release 12/01
Effect/Cause
An attempt was made to select a screen by
means of a function or job. This is not
possible because the screen number
specified does not exist.
Remedy
Check the screen number in the function or
job with the screen numbers configured.
Refer the number to a screen, if necessary.
Or: a screen could not be generated due to
insufficient system memory.
70017
Date/Time is not read from the area pointer
because the address set in the PLC is either
not available or has not been set up.
Change the address or set up the address in
the PLC.
70018
Acknowledgement that the password list has
been successfully imported.
–
70019
Acknowledgement that the password list has
been successfully exported.
–
70020
Acknowledgement for activation of message
recording.
–
70021
Acknowledgement for deactivation of
message recording.
–
70022
Acknowledgement to starting the Import
Password List action.
–
70023
Acknowledgement to starting the Export
Password List action.
–
70027
Backing up the RAM file system has been
started.
–
70028
Backing up of the RAM file system has been –
completed successfully.
The files from the RAM have been copied in
the Flash memory. Following a restart, these
saved files will be copied back in the RAM
file system.
70029
Backup of the RAM file system has failed.
No backup copy of the RAM file system has
been made.
70030
The parameters configured for the function
are faulty.
The connection to the new PLC was not
established.
70031
The PLC configured in the function is not an
S7 PLC.
The connection to the new PLC was not
established.
Check the settings in the OP Properties
dialog and save the RAM file system using
the Save Files button in the Persistent
Storage tab control.
Compare the parameters configured for the
function with the parameters configured for
the PLC and correct them as necessary.
Compare the S7 PLC name parameter
configured for the function with the
parameters configured for the PLC and
correct them as necessary.
80001
The archive specified is filled to the size
defined (in percent) and must be stored
elsewhere.
Store the file or table by executing a ‘move’
or ‘copy’ function.
80002
A line is missing in the specified archive.
–
C-4
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
HMI System Messages
Release 12/01
Number
80003
Effect/Cause
The copying process for archiving was not
successful.
Remedy
–
In this case, it is advisable to check any
subsequent system messages, too.
80006
Since archiving is not possible, this causes a
permanent loss of the functionality.
In the case of databases, check whether the
corresponding data source exists and start
up the system again.
80009
A copying action has been completed
successfully.
–
80010
Since the path was incorrectly entered in
ProTool, this causes a permanent loss of the
functionality.
Configure the path for the respective archive
again and restart the system when the full
functionality is required.
80012
Archive values are stored in a buffer. If the
values are read to the buffer faster than they
can be physically written (e.g. using a hard
disk), overloading may occur and recording
is then stopped.
Archive less values.
80013
The overload status no longer applies.
Archiving resumes the recording of all
values.
–
80014
The same action was triggered twice in quick –
succession. Since the process is already in
operation, the action is only carried out once.
80016
The archives are separated by the function
Close archive and the incoming entries
exceed the defined buffer size.
Or increase the recording interval.
Reconnect the archives.
All the jobs in the buffer are deleted.
80017
The incoming entries cause the defined
buffer size to be exceeded. This can be
caused, e.g. by several copying actions
being activated at the same time.
Terminate the copy process.
All the copy jobs in the buffer are deleted.
80018
All the archives are reconnected by means
of the DB layer, e.g. after executing the
function Open_archive.
–
Values are then written back into the tables.
80019
All the archives are separated from the DB
layer and all connections terminated, e.g.
after executing the function Close_archive.
–
Values are temporarily buffered and written
in the tables when the connection is
re-established.
There is no connection to the storage
medium and a change can take place.
80020
The max. number of simultaneously
activated copy actions has been exceeded.
Copying is not executed.
Wait until the current copying actions have
been completed and restart the last copy
action.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
C-5
HMI System Messages
Number
80021
Release 12/01
Effect/Cause
An attempt was made to delete an archive
which is still involved with a copy action.
Remedy
Wait until the current copying action has
been completed and restart the last action.
Deletion has not been executed.
80022
An attempt was made to start a sequence
archive, which is not a sequence archive,
from an archive using the function
Start_sequence_archive.
No sequence archive is created.
80023
An attempt was made to copy an archive to
itself.
Check the project for the following:
S the function Start_sequence_archive is
correctly configured.
S the variable parameters are being
correctly provided at the operating unit.
Check the project for the following:
S the function Copy_archive is correctly
configured.
The archive is not copied.
S the variable parameters are being
correctly provided at the operating unit.
80024
The function Copy_archive is configured not
to permit copying when the target archive
already contains data (Parameter: Write
mode).
Modify the function Copy_archive in the
project, if necessary.
Before initiating the function, delete the
target archive.
The archive is not copied.
80025
The copy action is interrupted.
–
Data written up to this point is retained.
Deletion of the target table (if configured) is
not executed.
The cancellation is documented by an error
entry $RT_ERR$ at the end of the target
table.
80026
The message is issued after all the archives
have been successfully initialized. Values
are written in the archives from this moment
on. Prior to this, no values are archived even
though the runtime software is operating.
–
80027
The internal Flash memory has been
specified as the memory location for an
archive. This is not permissible.
Configure ”Storage Card” as the memory
location or a network path.
No values will be archived for this archive
and the archive will not be created.
80028
The message serves as a status
acknowledgment that initialization of the
archives is currently running. No values are
archived until system message 80026 is
issued.
80029
The number of archives specified in the
Evaluate the additional system message,
message could not be initialized. Initialization related to this message, which is also
of the archives has been completed.
issued.
The faulty archives are not available for
archiving jobs.
C-6
–
Check the configuration, the ODBC (Open
Database Connectivity) and the specified
drive.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
HMI System Messages
Release 12/01
Number
80030
Effect/Cause
The structure of the table(s) available does
not match the archiving structure expected.
Remedy
Delete the existing tables manually, in
advance.
The archiving process is stopped for this
archive.
80032
Archives can be configured with a function
trigger. This is triggered as son as the
archive is full. If runtime is started and the
archive is already full, the trigger function will
not be initiated.
The archive specified no longer archives
data since it is full.
Stop the runtime, delete the archive and
restart the runtime again.
Or:
Configure a button in the runtime which
contains the same actions as the function
trigger and press it.
110000
The operating mode status has been
changed. The operating mode is now offline.
–
110001
The operating mode status has been
changed. The operating mode is now online.
–
110002
The operating mode status has not been
changed.
Check the connection to the PLCs.
110003
Check whether the address area for the area
pointer “Coordination” in the PLC is
available.
The operating status of the PLC specified is
–
changed by the function Connect/Disconnect
PLC.
The operating mode is now offline.
110004
The operating status of the PLC specified is
–
changed by the function Connect/Disconnect
PLC.
The operating mode is now online.
110005
An attempt was made to use the function
Connect/Disconnect PLC to switch the
specified PLC to operating mode online
although the entire system is in operating
mode Offline. This switch-over is not
permissible.
Switch the complete system to operating
mode online and execute the function again.
The PLC remains in operating mode offline.
110006
The Colorado system has been extended by
the addition of the User Version area pointer.
If the user version is not correct, the runtime
is stopped.
Check the user versions.
Either the wrong version was entered in the
PLC or configuration or the wrong
configuration was started for the PLC user
version.
120000
The trend is not displayed because an
incorrect axis to the trend, or incorrect trend,
has been configured.
Change the configuration.
120001
The trend is not displayed because an
incorrect axis to the trend, or incorrect trend,
has been configured.
Change the configuration.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
C-7
HMI System Messages
Number
Release 12/01
Effect/Cause
Remedy
120002
The trend is not displayed because the tag
assigned tries to access an invalid PLC
address.
Check whether the data area for the tag
exists in the PLC, the configured address is
correct or the value range for the tag is
correct.
130000
The action was not executed.
Close other applications.
Delete files no longer required from the hard
disk.
130001
The action was not executed.
Delete files no longer required from the hard
disk.
130002
The action was not executed.
Close other applications.
Delete files no longer required from the hard
disk.
130003
No target data carrier is inserted. The
process is stopped.
Check, for example, whether:
S access has been made to the correct
data carrier
S the data carrier has been inserted
130004
The target data carrier is write-protected.
The process is stopped.
Check whether access has been made to
the correct data carrier. Remove the write
protection.
130005
The file is write-protected. The process is
stopped.
Check whether access has been made to
the correct file. Modify the file attributes, if
necessary.
130006
No access to file is possible. The process is
stopped.
Check, for example, whether:
S access has been made to the correct file
S the file exists
S a different action prevents simultaneous
access to the file
140000
Online connection to the PLC has been
successfully established.
–
140001
Online connection to the PLC has been
disconnected.
–
140003
No tag updating or writing is executed.
Check the connection and whether the PLC
is switched on.
Check the parameter definitions in the
Control Panel using “Set PU/PC interface”.
Restart the system.
140004
No tag updating or writing is executed
because the access point or the subrack
configuration is incorrect.
Check the connection and whether the PLC
is switched on.
Check the access point or the subrack
configuration (MPI, PPI, PROFIBUS) in the
Control Panel with “Set PU/PC interface”.
Restart the system.
C-8
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
HMI System Messages
Release 12/01
Number
140005
Effect/Cause
No tag updating or writing is executed
because the address of the operating unit is
incorrect (possibly too high).
Remedy
Use a different operating unit address.
Check the connection and whether the PLC
is switched on.
Check the parameter definitions in the
Control Panel using “Set PU/PC interface”.
Restart the system.
140006
No tag updating or writing is executed
because the baud rate is incorrect.
Select a different baud rate in ProTool/Pro
(according to subrack, profile,
communication peer, etc.).
140007
No tag updating or writing is executed
because the bus profile is incorrect
(see %1).
Check the user defined bus profile.
The following parameters could not be
entered in the registry:
Check the parameter definitions in the
Control Panel using “Set PU/PC interface”.
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
Restart the system.
140008
Tslot
Tqui
Tset
MinTsdr
MaxTsdr
Trdy
Tid1
Tid2
Gap Factor
Retry Limit
Check the connection and whether the PLC
is switched on.
No tag updating or writing is executed
because the configuration data is incorrect:
Check the connection and whether the PLC
is switched on.
The following parameters could not be
entered in the registry:
Check the parameter definitions in the
Control Panel using “Set PU/PC interface”.
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
General errors
Restart the system.
Incorrect version
Profile cannot be entered in the registry.
Sub-network type cannot be entered in
the registry.
Target rotation time cannot be entered
in the registry.
Highest address (HSA) incorrect.
140009
No tag updating or writing is executed
because the module for the S7
communication was not found.
Re-install the module in the Control Panel
using “Set PU/PC interface”.
140010
No S7 communication peer could be found
because the PLC is switched off.
Switch the PLC on.
DP/T:
The option “Is not active as the only master”
is set in the Control Panel under “Set PU/PC
interface”.
140011
No tag updating or writing is executed
because communication is interrupted.
DP/T:
If only one master is connected to the
network, deactivate the option “Is not active
as the only master” in “Set PU/PC interface”.
If the network has more than one master,
switch this master on. Do not modify any
settings here, otherwise a bus fault may
occur.
Check the connection and that the
communication peer is switched on.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
C-9
HMI System Messages
Number
140012
Release 12/01
Effect/Cause
There is an initialization problem (e.g. when
ProTool/Pro RT has been terminated in the
Task Manager).
Remedy
Restart the operating unit.
Or start ProTool/Pro RT first and then the
other applications.
Or: another application (e.g. STEP7,
WINCC) is active with different bus
parameters and the driver cannot be started
with the new bus parameters (e.g. baud
rate).
140013
The MPI cable is not plugged in and, thus,
there is no power supply.
Check the connections.
140014
–
Modify the operating unit address in the
configuration in PLC.
140015
Incorrect baud rate
Correct the incorrect parameters.
Or: incorrect bus parameter (e.g. HSA)
Or: OP address HSA
Or: incorrect interrupt vector (interrupt does
not arrive at the driver)
140016
–
Change the interrupt number.
140017
–
Change the interrupt number.
140018
The consistency check was deactivated by
Simotion Scout.
Activate the consistency check with Simotion
Scout again and load the configuration in the
project once more.
Only one appropriate note appears.
140019
Simotion Scout loads a new project in the
PLC.
Wait until the end of the reconfiguration.
Connection to the PLC is interrupted.
140020
The version in the PLC and that in the
configuration (FWD file) do not match.
S Load the current version in the PLC
Connection to the PLC is interrupted.
S Generate the anew project using
using Simotion Scout.
ProTool CS, end ProTool RT and start
with the new configuration.
150000
No more data is read or written.
Possible causes:
S The cable is defective.
S The PLC does not respond, is defective,
Check that the cable is plugged in, the PLC
is operational, the correct interface is used.
Reboot the system if the system message is
displayed continuously.
etc.
S Connection is established via the wrong
interface.
S The system is overloaded.
150001
C-10
Connection is re-established because the
cause of the interruption has been
eliminated.
–
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
HMI System Messages
Release 12/01
Number
160000
Effect/Cause
No more data is read or written.
Possible causes:
S The cable is defective.
S The PLC does not respond, is defective,
Remedy
Check that the cable is plugged in, the PLC
is operational, the correct interface is used.
Reboot the system if the system message is
displayed continuously.
etc.
S Connection is established via the wrong
interface.
S The system is overloaded.
160001
Connection is re-established because the
cause of the interruption has been
eliminated.
–
160010
There is no connection to the server
because the server identification (CLS-ID)
cannot be established.
Check the access rights.
Values cannot be read or written.
160011
There is no connection to the server
because the server identification (CLS-ID)
cannot be established.
Values cannot be read or written.
160012
There is no connection to the server
because the server identification (CLS-ID)
cannot be established.
Values cannot be read or written.
Check, for example, whether:
S the server name is correct
S the computer name is correct
S the server is registered
Check, for example, whether:
S the server name is correct
S the computer name is correct
S the server is registered
Information for experienced users:
Interpret the value from HRESULT.
160013
The specified server was started as InProc
Server. This has not been released and may
possibly lead to incorrect behavior because
the server is running in the same process
area as the ProTool/Pro RT runtime
software.
Configure the server as OutProc Server or
Local Server.
160014
Only one OPC server project can be started
on a PC/MP. An error message appears
when an attempt is made to start a second
project.
Do not start a second project with OPC
server functionality on the computer.
The second project has no OPC server
functionality and cannot be located as an
OPC server from external sources.
170000 1)
S7 diagnostics messages are not displayed
because it is not possible to logon to the S7
diagnostics with this unit. The service
program is not supported.
–
170001 1)
The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be
displayed because communication with the
PLC has been switched off.
Switch the PLC online
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
C-11
HMI System Messages
Number
Release 12/01
Effect/Cause
Remedy
1)
The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be
displayed because reading in the
diagnostics buffer (SZL) was terminated due
to an error.
–
170003 1)
The display of an S7 diagnostics message is
not possible. An internal error %2 has been
reported.
–
170004 1)
The display of an S7 diagnostics message is
not possible. An internal error with error
class %2, error number %3 has been
reported.
–
170007 1)
It is not possible to read in the S7
diagnostics buffer (SZL) because it was
terminated with an internal error with error
class %2 and error code %3.
–
180000
A component/OCX receives configuration
data with a version identification which is not
supported.
Install a newer component.
180001
The system is overloaded because too many
actions have been activated simultaneously.
S Increase the configured cycle times or
Not all the actions can be executed, some
are rejected.
S Generate the messages slower (polling).
S Trigger the scripts and functions at
170002
basic clock.
greater intervals.
S If the message appears more frequently:
Restart the operating unit.
180002
The screen keyboard could not be activated.
Possible causes:
If Windows 95 is not available:
Install the runtime software again.
S The screen keyboard is not generally
supported under Windows 95.
S The file “TouchInputPC.exe” was not
registered due to an incorrectly executed
Setup.
190000
It is possible that the tag will not be updated.
–
190001
The tag is updated following an error status
after the cause of the last error state has
been eliminated (return to normal operation).
–
190002
The tag is not updated because
communication to the PLC has been
switched off.
Switch on communication via the function
“Set Online”.
190004
The tag is not updated because the
configured address is not available for this
tag.
Check the configuration.
190005
The tag is not updated because the
configured PLC type does not exist for this
tag.
Check the configuration.
190006
The tag is not updated because it is not
Check the configuration.
possible to map the PLC type in the tag type.
C-12
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
HMI System Messages
Release 12/01
Number
Effect/Cause
Remedy
190007
The tag values are not modified because the
connection to the PLC has been terminated
or the tag is offline.
Switch Online or re-establish connection to
the PLC.
190008
The threshold values configured for the tag
have been violated, e.g. by
Observe the configured or current threshold
value of the tag.
S an entered value,
S a function,
S a script.
190009
An attempt has been made to assign a value
to a tag which is outside the value range
permitted for this type.
Observe the value range for the tag type.
E.g. a value of 260 entered for a byte tag or
a value of -3 for a signless word tag.
190010
The tag is described with values too often
(e.g. in a loop triggered by a script).
Increase the time interval between the
multi-writing tasks.
Values are lost because the maximum of
100 event have been stored in the buffer.
190011
Possible causes:
S The value entered could not be written to Ensure that the value entered is within the
the configured PLC tag because it was
either above or below the value range.
The input is rejected and the original
value is reset.
S Connection to the PLC has been
value range of the PLC tags.
Check the connection to the PLC.
interrupted.
190012
It is not possible to convert a value from a
source format to a target format, e.g.:
Check the value range or type of the
variable.
S A value should be assigned to a counter
which is outside the valid,
PLC-dependent value range.
S A tag of the type Integer should be
assigned a value of the type String.
190100
The area pointer is not updated because the
configured address for this area pointer is
not available.
Check the configuration.
Type:
1
Event messages
2
Alarm messages
3
PLC acknowledgment
4
Operating unit acknowledgment
5
LED assignment
6
Trend request
7
Trend transfer 1
8
Trend transfer 2
No.:
is the consecutive number displayed in
ProTool/Pro.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
C-13
HMI System Messages
Number
190101
Release 12/01
Effect/Cause
The area pointer is not updated because it is
not possible to map the PLC type in the area
pointer type.
Remedy
–
Parameter type and no.:
See message 190100
190102
The area pointer is updated following an
error status after the cause of the last error
state has been eliminated (return to normal
operation).
–
Parameter type and no.:
See message 190100
200000
Coordination is not executed because the
address configured in the PLC does not
exist/has not been set up.
Change the address or set up the address in
the PLC.
200001
Coordination is not executed because the
address configured in the PLC cannot be
written.
Change the address or set up the address in
the PLC in an area which can be written.
200002
Coordination is not carried out at the
moment because the address format of the
area pointer does not match the internal
storage format.
Internal error
200003
Coordination can be executed again
because the last error status has been
eliminated (return to normal operation).
–
200004
It is possible that coordination is not
executed.
–
200005
No more data is read or written.
Check that the cable is connected and the
PLC is in order.
Possible causes:
S The cable is defective.
S The PLC does not respond, is defective,
Reboot the system if the system message is
displayed continuously.
etc.
S The system is overloaded.
210000
Jobs are not processed because the
address configured in the PLC does not
exist/has not been set up.
Change the address or set up the address in
the PLC.
210001
Jobs are not processed because the
address configured in the PLC cannot be
written to/read from.
Change the address or set up the address in
the PLC in an area which can be written
to/read from.
210002
Commands are not executed because the
address format of the area pointer does not
match the internal storage format.
Internal error
210003
The job mailbox is processed again because
the last error status has been eliminated
(return to normal operation).
–
210004
It is possible that the job mailbox is not
processed.
–
210005
A PLC job was triggered by an impermissible Check the PLC program.
number.
C-14
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
HMI System Messages
Release 12/01
Number
210006
Effect/Cause
A fault occurred while attempting to execute
the PLC job. The PLC job is, therefore, not
executed.
Remedy
Check the parameter types in the PLC job.
Compile the configuration again.
Observe the subsequent/previous system
message, if appropriate.
220000 2)
See footnote
220001
The tag is not downloaded because the
Change the configuration.
associated channel/the unit does not support
downloading the data type bool/bit.
220002
The tag is not downloaded because the
Change the configuration.
associated channel/the unit does not support
downloading the data type byte.
220003
The associated driver could not be
uploaded. It is possible that the driver is not
installed.
Install the driver by re-installing
ProTool/Pro RT.
220004
Communication is terminated and no update
is executed because the cable is not
connected or is defect etc.
Check the connection.
220005
Communication is running.
–
220006
The connection is established to the
specified PLC at the specified interface.
–
220007
The connection to the specified PLC at the
specified interface is disconnected.
Check that:
See footnote
S
S
S
S
the cable is plugged in
the PLC is OK
the correct interface is used
the configuration is OK (interface
parameters, protocol settings, PLC
address).
Reboot the system if the system message is
displayed continuously.
220008
The PLC driver cannot access the specified
interface or open it. It is possible that another
application is using this interface or an
interface is used which is not available on
the target device.
Terminate all the programs which access the
interface and reboot the computer.
Use another interface which is available in
the system.
There is no communication with the PLC.
230000
The value entered could not be accepted.
The entered value is rejected and the
previous value is specified again.
Enter a permissible value.
Either the value range has been exceeded
or impermissible characters were entered.
230002
Since the current password level is
inadequate or the password dialog box was
closed with ESC, the entry is rejected and
the previous value is specified again.
Activate an adequate password level using
Login.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
C-15
HMI System Messages
Number
230003
240000 3)
Release 12/01
Effect/Cause
Remedy
Changeover to the specified screen is not
executed because the screen is not
available/configured. The current screen
remains selected.
Configure the screen.
Runtime is operating in Demo mode.
Load the license.
Check the selection function.
There is either no Stopcopy license or it is
defect.
240001 3)
Runtime is operating in Demo mode.
Load an adequate license / powerpack.
Too many tags are configured for the
installed version.
240002 3)
Runtime is operating with a time-limited
standby authorization.
Restore the full authorization.
240003
Authorization cannot be executed.
Restart ProTool/Pro RT or reinstall it.
ProTool/Pro RT is running in Demo mode.
240004
Error during reading the standby
authorization.
ProTool/Pro RT is running in Demo mode.
Restart ProTool/Pro RT, install the
authorization or repair the authorization (see
Commissioning Instructions Software
Protection).
250000
The tag in the specified line in Status/Control
is not updated because the address
configured for this tag is not available.
Check the set address and then check that
the address has been set up in the PLC.
250001
The tag in the specified line in Status/Control
is not updated because the PLC type
configured for this tag is not available.
Check the set address.
250002
The tag in the specified line in Status/Control
is not updated because it is not possible to
map the PLC type in the tag type.
Check the set address.
250003
No connection could be established to the
PLC. The tags will not be updated.
Check the connection to the PLC. Check
that the PLC is switched on and online is
activated.
260000
A password has been entered which is
unknown to the system. Therefore, the
lowest password level has been set. This
corresponds to the status following Logout.
Enter a known password in the password
input field (with corresponding level).
260001
A password has been entered whose
assigned level does not permit execution of
the function.
Modify the password level in the password
input field enter a password with a
sufficiently high level.
The password level currently set is displayed
for information purposes.
260003
The user has logged off from the system. If
the password level is 0, no user is logged
on.
–
270000
A tag is not displayed in the message
because it attempts to access an invalid
address in the PLC.
Check whether the data area for the tag
exists in the PLC, the configured address is
correct or the value range for the tag is
correct.
C-16
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
HMI System Messages
Release 12/01
Number
270001
Effect/Cause
There is a unit-dependent limit as to how
many messages may be queued
simultaneously in order to be displayed (see
GHB). This limit has been exceeded.
Remedy
–
The display no longer contains all the
messages.
However, all the messages are recorded in
the message buffer.
270002
Messages are displayed from an archive are
displayed for which there is no data in the
current project.
Delete older archive files, if necessary.
Placeholders are issued for the messages.
270003
The service cannot be set up because too
many devices was to set up this service.
Connect fewer operating units which want to
use the service.
A maximum of four devices can execute this
action.
280000
Connection is re-established because the
cause of the interruption has been
eliminated.
–
280001
No more data is read or written.
Check that the cable is plugged in, the PLC
is operational, the correct interface is used.
Possible causes:
S The cable is defective.
S The PLC does not respond, is defective,
Reboot the system if the system message is
displayed continuously.
etc.
S Connection is established via the wrong
interface.
S The system is overloaded.
280002
A connection is used which requires a
function module in the PLC.
–
The function block has replied.
Communication can now proceed.
280003
A connection is used which requires a
function module in the PLC.
Check that the cable is plugged in, the PLC
is operational, the correct interface is used.
The function block does not reply.
Reboot the system if the system message is
displayed continuously.
The remedy is dependent on the error code:
1: The function block must set the COM
bit in the response container.
2:
The function block may not set the
ERROR bit in the response container
3:
The function block must respond within
the specified time (timeout)
4:
Establish an online connection to the
PLC
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
C-17
HMI System Messages
Number
280004
Release 12/01
Effect/Cause
The online connection to the PLC has been
interrupted. There is no data exchange at
present.
Remedy
Check the PLC parameters in ProTool Pro:
baud rate, block length, station address.
Check that the cable is plugged in, the PLC
is operational, the correct interface is used.
Reboot the system if the system message is
displayed continuously.
290000
The tag could not be read or written. It is
assigned the start value.
Check in the configuration that the address
has been set up in the PLC.
The message can be entered in the
message buffer for up to four more failed
tags, if necessary. After that, the message
number 290003 is issued.
290001
An attempt has been made to assign a value
to a tag which is outside the value range
permitted for this type.
Observe the value range for the tag type.
The message can be entered in the
message buffer for up to four more failed
tags, if necessary. After that, the message
number 290004 is issued.
290002
It is not possible to convert a value from a
source format to a target format.
Check the value range or type of the
variable.
The message can be entered in the
message buffer for up to four more failed
tags, if necessary. After that, the message
number 290005 is issued.
290003
This message is issued when message
number 290000 is triggered more than five
times.
Check in the configuration that the tag
addresses have been set up in the PLC.
In this case, no further individual messages
are generated.
290004
This message is issued when message
number 290001 is triggered more than five
times.
Observe the value range for the tag type.
In this case, no further individual messages
are generated.
290005
This message is issued when message
number 290002 is triggered more than five
times.
Check the value range or type of the
variable.
In this case, no further individual messages
are generated.
290006
The threshold values configured for the tag
have been violated by values entered.
Observe the configured or current threshold
value of the tag.
290007
There is a difference between the source
and target structure of the recipe currently
being processed. The target structure
contains an additional data record tag which
is not available in the source structure.
Insert the specified data record tag in the
source structure.
The data record tag specified is assigned its
start value.
C-18
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
HMI System Messages
Release 12/01
Number
290008
Effect/Cause
Remedy
There is a difference between the source
and target structure of the recipe currently
being processed. The source structure
contains an additional data record tag which
is not available in the target structure and
therefore cannot be assigned.
Remove the specified data record tag in the
specified recipe from the project.
The value is rejected.
290010
The storage location configured for the
recipe is not permitted.
Check the path specification configured.
Possible causes:
Impermissible characters, write protected,
data medium full or does not exist.
290011
The data record specified by the number
does not exist.
Check the source for the number (constant
or variable value).
290012
The recipe specified by the number does not
exist.
Check the source for the number (constant
or variable value).
290013
An attempt was made to save a data record
under a data record number which already
exists.
S Check the source for the number
The process is not executed.
(constant or variable value).
S Delete the data record beforehand.
S Change the function parameter
“Overwrite”.
290014
The file specified to be imported could not be
found.
S Check the file name.
S Ensure that the file is in the specified
directory.
290020
Acknowledgement that downloading of data
records from operating unit to PLC has
started.
–
290021
Acknowledgement that downloading of data
records from operating unit to PLC has been
completed without any errors.
–
290022
Acknowledgement that downloading of data
records from operating unit to PLC has been
terminated due to an error.
Check the configuration:
S have the tag addresses been set up in
the PLC?
S does the recipe number exist?
S does the data record number exist?
S has the function parameters ”Overwrite”?
290023
Acknowledgement that downloading of data
records from the PLC to the operating unit
has started.
–
290024
Acknowledgement that downloading data
records from the PLC to the operating unit
has been completed without any errors.
–
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
C-19
HMI System Messages
Number
290025
Release 12/01
Effect/Cause
Acknowledgement that downloading of data
records from the PLC to the operating unit
has been terminated due to an error.
Remedy
Check the configuration:
S have the tag addresses been set up in
the PLC?
S does the recipe number exist?
S does the data record number exist?
S has the function parameters ”Overwrite”?
290026
An attempt has been made to read/write a
data record although the data mailbox is not
free at present.
Set the data mailbox status to zero.
This error may occur in the case of recipes
for which downloading with synchronization
has been configured.
290027
No connection to the PLC can be
established at present. Therefore, the data
record can neither be read nor written.
Check the connection to the PLC.
Possible causes:
No physical connection to the PLC (no cable
plugged in, cable is defect) or the PLC is
switched off.
290030
This message is issued after reselecting a
screen that contains a recipe display in
which a data record has already been
selected.
Reload the data record from the data
medium or retain the current values.
290031
While saving, it was detected that a data
record with the specified number already
exists.
Overwrite the data record or cancel the
process.
290032
While exporting data records, it was detected Overwrite the file cancel the process.
that a file with the specified name already
exists.
290033
Confirmation request before deleting data
records.
–
290040
A data record error with error code %1 has
occurred which cannot be described in more
detail.
Check that the data carrier, the data record,
the data mailbox and, if necessary, the
connection to the PLC.
The action was canceled.
Trigger the action again after waiting a short
period.
It might be that the data mailbox has not
been installed correctly on the PLC.
If the error occurs again, please contact the
Customer Support. Specify the error code
displayed.
290041
A data record or file cannot be saved
because the data medium is full.
Delete files no longer required.
290042
An attempt was made to execute several
recipe actions simultaneously.
Trigger the action again after waiting a short
period.
The last action was not executed.
290043
C-20
Confirmation request before storing data
records.
–
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
HMI System Messages
Release 12/01
Number
Effect/Cause
Remedy
290044
The data store for the recipe has been
destroyed and will be deleted.
–
290050
Acknowledgement that the exportation of
data records has started.
–
290051
Acknowledgement that the exportation of
data records has been completed
successfully.
–
290052
Acknowledgement that the exportation of
data records has been terminated due to
errors.
Ensure that the structure of the data records
on the data medium and the current recipe
structure on the operating unit are identical.
290053
Acknowledgement that the importation of
data records has been started.
–
290054
Acknowledgement that the importation of
data records has been completed
successfully.
–
290055
Acknowledgement that the importation of
data records has been terminated due to
errors.
Ensure that the structure of the data records
on the data medium and the current recipe
structure on the operating unit are identical.
290056
The value in the specified line/column could
not be read/written without errors.
Check the specified line/column.
The action was canceled.
290057
The tags of the recipe specified have been
switched from operating mode “offline” to
“online”.
–
Each modification of a tag in this recipe is
now immediately transferred to the PLC.
290058
The tags of the recipe specified were
switched from operating mode “online” to
“offline”.
–
Modifications to tags in this recipe are no
longer immediately transferred to the PLC
but must be transferred there explicitly by
means of downloading a data record, if
necessary.
290059
Acknowledgement that the specified data
record has been stored successfully.
–
290060
Check-back message that the data record
memory has been successfully erased.
–
290061
Check-back message, that erasing the data
record memory was aborted with errors.
–
290068
Request to confirm whether all data records
in the recipe should be deleted.
–
290069
Request to confirm whether all data records
of all recipes should be deleted.
–
290070
The data record specified is not contained in
the import file.
Check the source of the data record number
or data record name
(constant or tag value).
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
C-21
HMI System Messages
Number
Release 12/01
Effect/Cause
Remedy
300000
Process monitoring (e.g. using PDiag or
S7-Graph) has been incorrectly
programmed: More messages are queued
than specified in the technical data of the
CPU. No further ALARM_S messages can
be managed by the CPU and reported to
operating systems.
Change the CPU configuration.
310000
An attempt is being made to print too many
protocols simultaneously.
Wait until printout of the last active protocol
has been concluded.
Since only one protocol can be printed at a
time, the print job is rejected.
Repeat the print job, if necessary.
An error occurred on triggering the printer.
The protocol is either not printed or printed
with errors.
Evaluate the additional system message,
related to this message, which is also
issued.
310001
Repeat the print job, if necessary.
320000
320001
The movements have already been
indicated by another device.
The movements can no longer be served.
Select the movements on the other display
units and select the movement screen on the
required display unit.
The network is too complex.
Display the network in AWL.
The defective operands cannot be
displayed.
320002
No diagnostics-capable alarm messages
have been selected.
Select a diagnostics-capable alarm message
in the message screen ZP_ALARM.
The units related to the alarm messages
could not be selected.
320003
No alarm messages exist in respect of the
selected unit.
Select the defective unit in the general view
screen.
No network can be displayed in the detail
display.
320004
The required signal statuses could not be
read by the PLC.
The defective operands cannot be
established.
320005
The project contains ProAgent partitions
which are not installed.
Check the consistency between the
configuration on the display unit and the PLC
program loaded.
In order to run the project, install the
ProAgent option packet.
No ProAgent diagnostics can be performed.
320014
The selected PLC cannot be evaluated for
ProAgent.
Check the parameters of the
Evaluate_message_display_fault
The message display configured with the
Evaluate_message_display_fault function
could not be found.
function.
1)
The optional parameter %1 at the start of the message may contain an identification for the S7 connection
when several S7s are in parallel operation and are connected to diagnostics equipment.
2) A WinCC channel provides the message texts via an interface. This text is issued via this message.
ProTool/Pro RT has no influence on this texts.
3) The specified text comes from the component resources.
C-22
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
HMI System Messages
Procedure in the case of “internal errors”
Please proceed as follows in the case of all system messages related to “internal
errors”:
1. Start up the operating unit again.
2. Download the configuration again.
3. Switch the operating unit off, stop the PLC and then restart both.
4. If the error occurs again, please contact the SIMATIC Customer Support. Make
reference to the specified error number and message tags.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
C-23
HMI System Messages
C-24
Release 12/01
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
ESD Guidelines
D
What does ESD mean?
Virtually all present-day modules incorporate highly integrated MOS devices or
components. For technological reasons, these electronic components are very
sensitive to overvoltages and consequently therefore to electrostatic discharge:
These devices are referred to in German as Elektrostatisch Gefährdeten
Bauelemente/ Baugruppen: “EGB”
The more frequent international name is:
“ESD” (Electrostatic Sensitive Device)
The following symbol on plates on cabinets, mounting racks or packages draws
attention to the use of electrostatic sensitive devices and thus to the contact
sensitivity of the assemblies concerned:
ESDs may be destroyed by voltages and energies well below the perception
threshold of persons. Voltages of this kind occur as soon as a device or an
assembly is touched by a person who is not electrostatically discharged . Devices
exposed to such overvoltages cannot immediately be detected as defective in the
majority of cases since faulty behavior may occur only after a long period of
operation.
Precautions against electrostatic discharge
Most plastics are capable of carrying high charges and it is therefore imperative
that they be kept away from sensitive components.
When handling electrostatic sensitive devices, make sure that persons, workplaces
and packages are properly grounded.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
D-1
ESD Guidelines
Release 12/01
Handling ESD assemblies
A general rule is that assemblies should be touched only when this cannot be
avoided owing to the work that has to performed on them. Under no circumstances
should you handle printed-circuit boards by touching device pins or circuitry.
You should touch devices only if
S
you are grounded by permanently wearing an ESD wrist strap or
S
you are wearing ESD shoes or ESD shoe-grounding protection straps in
conjunction with an ESD floor.
Before you touch an electronic assembly, your body must be discharged. The
simplest way of doing this is to touch a conductive, grounded object immediately
beforehand – for example, bare metal parts of a cabinet, water pipe etc.
Assemblies should not be brought into contact with charge-susceptible and highly
insulating materials such as plastic films, insulating table tops and items of clothing
etc. containing synthetic fibers.
Assemblies should be deposited only on conductive surfaces (tables with an ESD
coating, conductive ESD cellular material, ESD bags, ESD shipping containers).
Do not place assemblies near visual display units, monitors or television sets
(minimum distance to screen > 10 cm).
Measuring and modifying ESD assemblies
Perform measurements on ESD assemblies only when
S
the measuring instrument is grounded – for example, by means of a protective
conductor – or
S
the measuring head has been briefly discharged before measurements are
made with a potential-free measuring instrument – for example, by touching a
bare metal control cabinet.
When soldering, use only grounded soldering irons.
Shipping ESD assemblies
Always store and ship assemblies and devices in conductive packing – for
example, metallized plastic boxes and tin cans.
If packing is not conductive, assemblies must be conductively wrapped before they
are packed. You can use, for example, conductive foam rubber, ESD bags,
domestic aluminum foil or paper (never use plastic bags or foils).
With assemblies containing fitted batteries, make sure that the conductive packing
does not come into contact with or short-circuit battery connectors. If necessary,
cover the connectors beforehand with insulating tape or insulating material.
D-2
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Glossary
A
Acknowledgement
Acknowledgement of an alarm message on the operating unit confirms that it has
been noted. After acknowledgement, the message disappears from the operating
unit. Alarm messages can be acknowledged either on the operating unit or PLC.
Alarm messages can be compiled into groups so that several messages can be
acknowledged simultaneously.
Acknowledgement groups
During configuration, several alarm messages can be compiled to form an
acknowledgement group. After acknowledging the first message, all the other
messages belonging to the same group are simultaneously acknowledged. This
enables, for example, acknowledgement of alarm messages for the cause of a
fault and all resulting faults (group acknowledgement).
Alarm message
Provides information on the operating unit concerning operating errors on the
machine or system connected to the PLC. The message text may also contain
current measured values.
Since alarm messages indicate abnormal operating status, they must be
acknowledged.
ALARM_S
Active message procedure by which the CPU issued messages to all the
registered network participants. ALARM_S messages are configured in STEP 7.
Analog display
A screen object which displays numeric values by means of a pointer instrument.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Glossary-1
Glossary
Release 12/01
Archive
A memory area on a data storage medium in which messages or tags can be
stored. The size of the archive is defined in ProTool/Pro CS.
Area pointer
Defines a memory area in the PLC for data exchange between the PLC and
operating unit.
B
Bar graphs
Represent values from the PLC as rectangular areas. This is a way of displaying
filling levels or workpiece numbers, for example, on the operating unit.
Baud rate
Rate of speed at which data is downloaded. Baud rate is specified in Bit/s.
Blanking circuit
Switch off or dim the screen back–lighting.
Boot
A loading process which downloads the operating system in the working memory
of the operating unit
Buttons
A virtual button on the operating unit screen. Buttons on operating units with touch
screens are contact sensitive.
Glossary-2
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Glossary
C
Clicking
Configurable event which can trigger a function assigned to a button, for example,
when the button is pressed and released (clicked) within the contour of the button.
If the button is pressed using the mouse button or finger (when using touch panels)
but moved outside the contour before releasing, the operating unit does not
interpret the action as a click event.
Clock
Screen object which displays the system time either as digits (digitally) or in the
form of a clock (analog).
Combo box
Contains a list of entries from which one can be selected on the operating unit.
Configuration
Definition of basic, system–specific settings, messages and screens using the
ProTool CS configuration software.
D
Data record
A recipe containing data. A recipe can be comprised of several data records.
When a data record is downloaded, all the assigned data is transferred to the PLC
together and synchronously.
Direct key
Buttons can be configured as direct keys in order to achieve fast keyboard
operation without any resulting communication–related delays.
Display period
Defines whether and how long a system message is displayed on the operating
unit.
Download
The transfer of run-capable project data to the operating unit. Connect the
operating unit to the configuration computer with a standard cable beforehand.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Glossary-3
Glossary
Release 12/01
Download mode
Operating unit operating mode in which data can be downloaded from the
configuration computer to the operating unit (also refer to Download).
E
Event
Functions are triggered by the arrival of defined events. Events can be configured
according to the object. Events which can be configured for a button include:
S
S
S
Click
Press
Release
Event message
Provides information on the operating unit concerning the operating statuses of the
machine or system connected to the PLC. The message text may also contain
current measured values.
F
Fixed window
Window which always appears at the top of the operating unit screen. The content
of the fixed window is independent of the screen currently open.
Flash memory
Programmable memory which can be electrically deleted and written to again
segment-by-segment.
Function key
Key on the operating unit to which a configurable function can be assigned. A
function key with a global function assignment always initiates the same function
regardless of the screen currently open. A function key with a local function
assignment (softkey) can have a different function for each screen.
Glossary-4
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Glossary
G
Global tag
This is a process tag linked to the PLC. Global tags have a fixed address in the
PLC. The operating unit accesses this address for reading and writing purposes.
Graphic display
This enables the dynamic positioning of graphics created in external graphics
programs in a project.
Graphic box
A graphic can be selected by selecting an entry in the graphic list.
Graphics list
A list in which each value relates to a tag assigned to a graphic. This enables, for
example, the assigned graphic to be displayed on the operating unit output field
instead of the value.
Group acknowledgement
During the configuration, each alarm message can be assigned to an
acknowledgement group. When the alarm message is acknowledged, all the
other alarm messages in the same group are simultaneously acknowledged.
H
Half Brightness Life
Time period after which the brightness of the lighting tube only achieves 50% of its
original value.
Hardcopy
Represents a printout of the current screen content. Windows called in on top are
not printed.
Help text
Configurable, additional information on messages, screens and fields. The help
text concerning an alarm message can, for example, contain information on the
cause of the fault and methods of elimination.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Glossary-5
Glossary
Release 12/01
History trend
After setting a trigger bit that reads all the trend values simultaneously from the
PLC, they are displayed as a history trend on the operating unit. History trends are
well suited for displaying distinct changes in a trend when the progress of a trend
curve is of more interest with regard to its full course (history) than to the individual
values.
I
Icon
Pixel graphic of a fixed size, e.g. assigned to a softkey, to identify its function.
Input field
Enables the user to enter values which are subsequently downloaded to the PLC.
Invisible buttons
Buttons which are only visible during configuration, not on the operating unit. If
invisible buttons are superimposed on components in the process screen, the
respective components can be operated by clicking the button with the mouse or
pressing them on the touch screen.
L
Limit value
Configurable values of a tag defining a value range. Attempts to define values
outside these limits, may cause the following effects on the operating unit:
S
Input field
input is rejected
S
Output field
values are displayed in the configured color
S
Trend/Bar
values are displayed in the configured color
Local tag
A tag without a link to the PLC. Local tags are only available on the operating unit.
Glossary-6
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Glossary
Release 12/01
Logout time
Configurable interval of time after which the password level is reset to zero when
the operating unit is not used.
M
Message arrival
Time at which a message was triggered by the PLC or operating unit.
Message buffer
Memory area in the operating unit in which message events can be stored in
chronological order as they arrive. Event messages and alarm messages are
stored in separate message buffers.
Message departure
Time at which a message was withdrawn by the PLC.
Message events
These are stored in chronological order in the operating unit message archive.
Message events consist of:
S
Message arrival
S
Message acknowledgement
S
Message departure
Message indicator
A configurable graphical symbol displayed on the operating unit when at least one
alarm message is present.
Message logging
Printout of messages parallel to their display on the operating unit display.
Message view
A screen object with configurable filter criteria which is used to display the volatile
message buffer or message archive.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Glossary-7
Glossary
Release 12/01
Multi Panel
Multi–purpose, configurable operating unit with graphic display and Windows CE
operating system for operating and monitoring machines and systems.
N
Normal operation
Operating unit operating mode in which messages are displayed and screens can
be operated.
O
Object
Is a component part of a screen or message. Depending on the object type,
objects serve to display or enter texts and values on the operating unit.
Operator Panel
Configurable operating unit for operating and monitoring machines and systems.
Operation is via buttons.
Output field
Displays current values from the PLC on the operating unit.
P
Password
A character string which must be entered on the operating unit before a protected
function can be activated. Each password is assigned to a defined password
level.
Password level
The rights to use operating units can be specifically restricted to certain users and
user groups. To do this, the individual functions and operating elements are
assigned to hierarchically defined password levels. The password level linked to
the password allocates the rights to execute functions on the operating unit
belonging to that level or lower.
Glossary-8
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Glossary
Password list
A screen object for entering passwords related to different authorization levels.
PCL
Hewlett Packard printer language (Printer Control Language).
PLC
General term for units and systems with which the operating unit
communicates (e.g. SIMATIC S7 or PC).
PLC job
PLC jobs can be used by the PLC to trigger functions on the operating unit, e.g.
display a screen.
Power-up test
Checks the status of the CPU and memory each time the power is switched on.
Press
Configurable event which may trigger a function assigned to a button, for example,
as the button is pressed.
Print screen
Printout of a copy of the screen contents.
Process screen
The display of process values and process progress on the operating unit in the
form of screens, which may contain graphics, texts and values.
Programmable controller
PLC from the SIMATIC S5 series (e.g. AG S5-115U/135U).
Programmable system
PLC from the SIMATIC S7 series (SIMATIC S7-200/300/400).
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Glossary-9
Glossary
Release 12/01
ProSave
A service tool which provides all the functions which are necessary for the transfer
of data between the configuration computer and operating unit.
ProTool
Full-graphic configuration software for configuring text displays, text–based and
graphics operator panels as well as units from the Windows CE range, such as
TP170/OP170/MP270/MP370.
ProTool CS
General name for the three configuration software variants ProTool/Pro CS,
ProTool and ProTool/Lite.
ProTool/Lite
Full-graphic configuration software for configuring text displays and text–based
operator panels as well as Windows-based 6” units such as TP170 A.
ProTool/Pro CS
Full-graphic configuration software for configuring the entire SIMATIC HMI product
range and Windows-based systems.
Q
Queued messages
Messages which have been detected as having been received by the operating
unit (message event Arrived) but for which the message event Departed has still
not occurred.
R
Recipe
A combination of tags to a fixed data structure. The data structure configured can
be assigned data on the operating unit and is then referred to as a data record.
The use of recipes ensures that when a data record is downloaded, all the
assigned data is transferred to the PLC together and synchronously.
Glossary-10
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Glossary
Recipe view
Screen object to create, edit, store and download data records.
Release
Configurable event, e.g. for a button, which triggers a function as soon as the
pressed button is released.
If the button is pressed using the mouse button or finger (when using touch panels)
but moved outside, the function is triggered when the function is released.
Remaining buffer
Configurable size of the message buffer. In the case of a buffer overflow, the
operating unit deletes message events until the configured remaining buffer
capacity is reached.
RS232
Standard interface for serial data transmission with defined voltage levels. Sender
and receiver are electrically connected.
RS485
Standard interface for serial data transmission with very high transmission rates.
Runtime software
The program visualization software SIMATIC ProTool/Pro RT with which the
project created using ProTool CS can be run on your Windows-based system.
S
Screen
A screen displays all the logically related process data on the operating unit,
whereby the individual values can be modified. Screens are composed of static
and dynamic parts. Static parts refer to text and graphics, dynamic parts to input
and output fields.
Screen keyboard
A virtual keyboard which appears on the operating unit screen. This enables values
to be entered without a keyboard actually being connected, in the case of a touch
panel for example.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Glossary-11
Glossary
Release 12/01
Selection field
Contains a list of entries from which one can be selected on the operating unit.
SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library
Comprehensive library containing graphics from the areas of technology and
production. Extends the ProTool library.
Slider controls
Screen object for entering and displaying numeric values in analog form.
Softkey
Function key on the operating unit with a local function assignment. The function
triggered by a softkey varies according to the screen currently open.
Start screen
The first screen which automatically appears after the operating unit has started
up.
State view
The State view is a configurable display element. Depending on the configuration,
it can signal a warning or the status of a unit which cannot be viewed from the
operating unit.
Status button
A status button is a display and operating element with two possible states: ON
and OFF, i.e. touched and untouched. Both states can be configured for display
with text or graphics, which then label the status button.
Status/Force tag
Screen object which enables direct read and write access from the operating unit
to individual address areas in the connected SIMATIC S5 or SIMATIC S7.
STEP 7
Programming software for SIMATIC S7, SIMATIC C7 and SIMATIC WinAC.
Glossary-12
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Glossary
Superuser
A user with permissions to trigger functions of the highest password level. The
superuser has access to all the operating unit functions.
Switch
A screen object for entering and displaying a binary status. A switch can only be in
the status on or off .
System message
Provides information on the operating unit concerning internal statuses of the
operating unit and PLC.
T
Trend curve
Curve type by which just one curve value is read from the PLC per cycle or trigger
resulting in a curve display. If the configured number of measured values is not
achieved, each new value overwrites the oldest value. Trend curves are especially
suited to displaying continual progress.
Trend curve graphic
A screen object for displaying the continual progress of process data. Several
different trend curves can be shown in the trend curve display simultaneously.
Trend view
Screen object providing a clear, continuous display of process data. Several
different curves can be displayed simultaneously in the trend curve display, e.g. in
the form of trend curves or history trends.
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Glossary-13
Glossary
Glossary-14
Release 12/01
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Index
A
Acknowledge
alarm messages, 5-26 , 5-31
Key, 4-16
Acknowledgement
acoustic, 1-4 , 1-5 , 4-3 , 8-11 , A-3
optical, 4-3
to touch operation, 4-3
Acknowledging, Alarm message, 5-22
Acknowledgment groups, 2-1
Acoustic acknowledgement, 1-4 , 1-5 , 4-3 ,
8-11 , A-3
Acoustic signal, 8-11
Active Sync, 3-22
load applications, 3-22
Air discharge, A-5
Alarm message buffer, example, 5-29
Alarm message page, 5-28
Alarm messages, 5-3 , 5-22 , 5-26
acknowledge, 5-26 , 5-31
Acknowledging, 5-22
ALARM_S, 2-1 , 5-24
Alignment, printer, 8-12
Alphanumeric input field, 5-10
Alphanumeric key assignment, 4-16
Alphanumeric keys, 4-15
Alphanumeric screen keyboard, 4-7 , 4-8
ALT, key, 4-17
Alt Gr level, screen keyboard, 4-8
Ambient conditions, A-4
Analog clock, 5-40
Analog display, 5-8 , 5-39
Analog/Digital clock, 5-9
Angle of inclination, 9-2 , A-4
Application examples, Recipes, 6-4
Application scenarios, recipes, 6-3
Apply, Status/Force, 5-46
Approvals, A-6
Archive, display data as trend, 5-36
Archive functions, 7-2
Archive_tag, function, 7-2
Archives, 7-1
Archiving, 2-3
Area of use, 1-2
AS511, 2-4
ASCII character set, Printer, 9-15
Assignment of interfaces, B-1
Authorization, 3-18
password protection, 5-41
Automatic downloading, 3-5
B
Back-lighting
off, 8-10
Screen, 1-4 , 1-5 , A-3
Backspace, key, 4-16
Backup, 3-13
CF card, 3-14
Flash card, 3-14
integrated ProSave, 3-16
Stand-alone ProSave, 3-16
Backup battery, 5-14 , 9-7 , 11-2 , A-4
Changing, 12-3
Backup/Restore, memory cards, 3-14
Barometric pressure, A-4
Bar graph, 5-8 , 5-33
Battery, 5-14 , 11-2 , A-4
Changing, 12-3
Battery connection, 9-7
Baud rate
download mode, 3-7
printer, 8-12
Bit triggering, 5-34
Blanking, screen, 2-4
Brightness
Screen, 2-4
Set, 4-18 , 8-6 , 8-7
Buffer overflow, Messages, 5-23
Buffering, Messages, 5-23
Burst interference, A-5
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Index-1
Index
Release 12/01
Button, 5-7 , 5-17
Apply (Status/Force), 5-46
hidden, 5-17
Message display, 5-31
Messages, 5-26
Status/Force, 5-46
Trend view, 5-35
Update (Status/Force), 5-46
C
Cable cross-section, 9-9
Cables, 9-6
Calculate, memory requirements, 6-9
Calendar dates, 5-14
Calibrate, touch screen, 8-7
Call
help text, MP 270B Touch, 4-5 , 4-6 , 4-7 ,
4-8
screen, 5-4
Call in, help text
MP 270B Key, 4-21
MP 270B Touch, 4-9
OP 270 10”, 4-21
OP 270 6”, 4-21
TP 270 10”, 4-9
TP 270 6”, 4-9
Cancel, Key, 4-16
Capacity
backup battery, A-4
memory, 1-4 , 1-5
Message buffer, 2-2
message buffer, 2-1
CF card, 6-7 , 6-15 , 11-4
Change
data record, 6-17
Language, 8-2
recipe structure, 6-27
Change structure, recipe, 6-27
Change window, 5-4
Change_mode, Function, 8-3
Changing, Battery, 12-3
Changing active window, 5-4
Character set, Printer, 9-15
Check, Limit value, 5-10
Circle, 5-7
Clean, unit, 12-1
Cleaning agents, 12-1
Clear_message_buffer, Function, 5-23
Click, event, 5-17
Index-2
Clock, 5-9 , 5-40
Internal, 11-2
Close, dialog, 4-19
Close_archive, function, 7-2
Color change
Input field, 4-19
input field, 5-11
Trend view, 5-34
Color display, 1-4 , 1-5 , A-3
Colors, 1-4 , 1-5 , A-3
Communication, 2-4
Communication options, 9-8
Compact Flash Card, 11-4 , A-2
Compatibility conflict, 3-3 , 3-4 , 13-1
Compress
project file, 3-12
PU function, 9-14
trend view, 5-35 , 5-36
Condensation, 9-2
Conduction, RF, A-5
Configuration
downloading back, 3-12
source file, 3-9 , 3-12
storage location, 3-9
test, 3-10
Configuration computer, Connect, 9-12
Configuration phase, 1-3
Configuration software, 1-3 , 1-6
Configure, Interface IF1B, 9-14
Confirm input, key, 4-16
Conflict, compatibility, 3-3 , 3-4 , 13-1
Connect
Configuration computer, 9-12
PLC, 9-13
Printer, 9-15
Connecting
electrical connections, 9-6
Power supply, 9-9
Connection
external keyboard, 9-16
external printer, 9-16
mouse, 9-16
Status/Force, 5-46
to configuration computer, 9-12
to external keyboard, 9-16
to mouse, 9-16
To PLC, 9-13
to PLC, 8-3
To printer, 9-15
UPS, 9-17
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Index
Release 12/01
Connections, Electrical, 9-6
Connector pin-out, B-1
Contact discharge, A-5
Contour, 5-17
Contrast
display, 8-7
setting, 4-18
Control keys, 4-14
Conventions, Date/Time, 5-14
Conversion functions, 2-3
Convert_Data_Record_Number_to_Name,
Function, 6-21
Copy, data records, 6-16
Copy data record, selecting a data record
name, 6-16
Copy_archive, function, 7-2
Copying data records after selecting a data
record name, 6-16
Create
data record, 6-15
Labeling strips, 10-11
Cross-section, Power supply, 9-9
CSV file, 6-24 , 6-25 , 7-1
CTRL, key, 4-17
Cursor
Key, 4-17
keys, 4-15
Cut-out, installation, A-2
Cycle triggering, 5-34
Cyclic archive, 7-3
Cyclic archiving, 7-2 , 7-3
D
Data, Technical, A-1
Data record
change, 6-17
copy, 6-16
create, 6-15
definition, 6-1 , 6-2
downloading, 6-19 , 6-20
editing, 6-10
import, 6-28
memory requirements, 6-9
number, 6-8
renaming, 6-17
save, 6-15
save as, 6-17
synchronization, 6-19
Data records
deleting, 6-18
display, 6-14
editing, 6-26
export/import, 6-24
exporting, 6-26
importing, 6-26
read from PLC, 6-18
Data structure, 6-2
Data type, Status/Force, 5-46
Data_Record_DAT_to_PLC, Function, 6-20 ,
6-23
Data_Record_Display_to_PLC, Function,
6-20, 6-23
Data_Record_PLC_to_DAT, Function, 6-20 ,
6-23
Data_Record_PLC_to_Display, 6-23
Function, 6-20
Data_Record_PLC_to_Tags, function, 6-20
Data_Record_Tags_to_PLC, function, 6-20
Date, 3-3 , 5-10 , 5-14
synchronization, 5-15
Date/Time, 5-6 , 8-10
DB number, Status/Force, 5-46
Decompress, project file, 3-12
Default settings, printer, 8-13
Degree of protection, 1-2 , 9-1 , A-2
Delete
data records, 6-18
key, 4-16
Messages, 5-23
messages, 5-23
On buffer overflow, 5-23
password, 5-43
Delete_archive, function, 7-2
Delete_Data_Record_from_Display, Function,
6-20
Delete_Data_Record_Memory, Function, 6-21
Depth, Installation, A-2
Device data, display, 8-9
Dialog, close, 4-19
Diecast clamps, 9-3 , 9-5
Digital/Analog clock, 5-9 , 5-40
Dim, screen, 8-10
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Index-3
Index
Release 12/01
Dimensions, A-2
MP 270B Key, 10-6
MP 270B Touch, 10-2
OP 270 10”, 10-6
OP 270 6”, 10-8
TP 270 10”, 10-2
TP 270 6”, 10-4
Direct key, 4-2
Discharge, Static, A-5
Display, 1-4 , 1-5
analog, 5-37
data records, 6-14
date/time, 5-14
messages, 5-23
numeric values, 5-37 , 5-39
set brightness, 8-6
time, 5-40
Display element
analog display, 5-39
date/time, 5-14
digital/analog clock, 5-40
message display, 5-30
output field, 5-6
status button, 5-19
Display elements
bar graph, 5-33
Recipe display, 6-12
trend view, 5-34
Display fill level, 5-33
Display Information Text, function, 4-10
Display priorities, Messages, 5-25
Display_event_message_window, Function,
5-26
DNS server, 8-15
Download
download back, 3-12
Operating mode, 8-3
options, 3-7
settings, 3-7
start automatically, 3-5
start manually, 3-4
Download back, 3-12
Download mode, 3-4 , 4-18
Downloading, data records to PLC, 6-19
Duration of display, 5-26
Dynamic labeling, 5-17
Dynamic screen partitions, 5-1
Index-4
E
Edit
data records, 6-10 , 6-26
messages, 5-26 , 5-31
Electrical connections, 9-6
Electrical installation, 9-6
Ellipse, 5-7
EMC-compatible installation, 9-6
Enter
key, 4-16
numeric values, 5-37
MP 270B Touch, 4-6
TP 270 10”, 4-6
password, 5-43
Enter alphanumeric values, TP 270 6”, 4-7
Enter numeric values
MP 270B Touch, 4-6
TP 270 10”, 4-6
TP 270 6”, 4-5
Enter symbolic value, 5-12
Entering
password, 5-41
Values, 4-19
Entering values, 4-19
Entry name, 6-2
Equipotential, 9-10
ESC/P compatible, 9-15
ESD guidelines, D-1
Ethernet, 8-15
Ethernet interface, 9-8
pin assignment, B-2
Event
click, 5-17
message processing, 5-26 , 5-31
pressing, 5-17 , 5-19
releasing, 5-17 , 5-19
status change, 5-19 , 5-21
switched off, 5-21
switched on, 5-21
Event message screen, 5-28
Event messages, 5-3 , 5-22 , 5-26
Events, 5-17 , 5-19 , 5-21
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Index
Release 12/01
Example
CSV file, 6-25
Date/Time, 5-14
Network functions, 8-18
password list, 5-43
performance (archives), 7-3
recipe, 6-2
Exit_runtime, function, 7-4
Expand
trend view, 5-35
Trends, 5-36
Expansion, memory, 11-4
Export
data record, 6-24
data records, 6-26
password list, 5-43
Export_Data_Records, Function, 6-20 , 6-23
External dimensions, A-2
External keyboard
connection, 9-16
operation, 4-22
F
Features, 1-1
File, Labeling strips, 10-12
File format, CSV, 6-24
Filter criteria, Message display, 5-30
Fixation, 9-2
keyboard unit, 9-3
touch panels, 9-5
Fixed window, 5-2
Flash memory, 6-7 , 6-15
Backup/Restore, 3-13
Flashing
LED, 4-13
messages, 5-25
FM Approval, A-6
Foil, Labeling strips, 10-11
Force, Status/Force, 5-8
Force value, 5-46
Format
archive file, 7-1
Date/Time, 5-14
Paper, 8-12
Status/Force, 5-46
Front panel, Thickness, 9-1 , 10-2 , 10-4 ,
10-6, 10-8
Front view
MP 270B Key, 10-6
MP 270B Touch, 10-2
OP 270 10”, 10-6
OP 270 6”, 10-8
TP 270 10”, 10-2
TP 270 6”, 10-4
Function
Convert_Data_Record_Number_to_Name,
6-21
Copy_archive, 7-2
Data_Record_DAT_to_PLC, 6-20 , 6-23
Data_Record_Display_to_PLC, 6-20 , 6-23
Data_Record_PLC_to_DAT, 6-20 , 6-23
Data_Record_PLC_to_Display, 6-20 , 6-23
Data_Record_PLC_to_Tags, 6-20
Data_Record_Tags_to_PLC, 6-20
Delete_Data_Record_from_Display, 6-20
Delete_Data_Record_Memory, 6-21
Export_Data_Records, 6-20 , 6-23
Import_Data_Records, 6-24 , 6-26
Load_Data_Record, 6-20
New_Data_Record, 6-20
Recipe_Tags_Online_Offline, 6-20
Save_Data_Record_from_Display, 6-20
Save_Data_Record_from_Display_as, 6-20
Save_Date_Record, 6-20
Synchronize_Data_Record_in_Display,
6-20
Function keys, 1-4 , 1-5 , 4-12
labeling, 10-9
LED, 4-13
Functionality, 2-1
Functions
Archive_tag, 7-2
Change_mode, 8-3
Clear_message_buffer, 5-23
Close_archive, 7-2
Connect_Disconnect_PLC, 5-25
Delete_archive, 7-2
Display Information Text, 4-10
Display_event_message_window, 5-26
Exit_runtime, 7-4
Export_Data_Records, 6-24 , 6-26
Go_to_End, 4-9
Go_to_Home, 4-9
Import_Data_Records, 6-20 , 6-23
Import_export_passwords, 5-44
Language, 8-2
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Index-5
Index
Release 12/01
Functions
Login_user, 5-5
Logoff_user, 5-5 , 5-42
Open_archive, 7-2
Page_Down, 4-9
Page_Up, 4-9
reading line, 5-34
Show_alarm_message_buffer, 5-29
Show_alarm_message_page, 5-28
Show_event_message_buffer, 5-29
Show_event_message_page, 5-28
Start Screen Keyboard, 4-4 , 4-20
Start_archive, 7-2
Start_sequence_archive, 7-2
Stop_archive, 7-2
Trend_view_read_mark_backward, 5-34
Trend_view_read_mark_forward, 5-34
Trend_view_read_mark_on_off, 5-34
Use_Screen_Keyboard_On/Off, 4-4
Fuse, A-3
FWD files, 3-12
Help text, 2-3
call in
MP 270B Key, 4-21
MP 270B Touch, 4-5 , 4-6 , 4-7 , 4-8 ,
4-9
OP 270 10”, 4-21
OP 270 6”, 4-21
TP 270 10”, 4-9
TP 270 6”, 4-9
Display (key), 4-16
messages, 5-26 , 5-31
Hidden buttons, 5-17
Hide, screen keyboard, 4-5 , 4-6 , 4-7 , 4-8
Hierarchy, Password, 5-41
HMI system messages, C-1
Language, C-1
Home position, Status button, 5-19
Housing, A-2
Humidity, A-4
I
G
General operation
MP 270B Key, 4-11
MP 270B Touch, 4-2
OP 270, 4-11
TP 270, 4-2
global function keys, 4-12
Go_to_End, function, 4-9
Go_to_Home, function, 4-9
Graphic, 5-6
Graphic display, 5-6
Graphic box, 5-7 , 5-16
Graphics list, 5-7
Grounding, 9-6
Grounding connection, 9-6
Grounding screw, 9-6
Group acknowledgement, 2-1 , 4-16
Guidelines, EEC, A-5
Icon, 4-13
Icons, 5-2
IF1A interface, assignment, B-1
IF1B interface, assignment, B-1
IF2 interface, assignment, B-2
Import
data record, 6-24
data records, 6-26
password list, 5-43
Import_Data_Records, function, 6-20 , 6-23
Import_export_passwords, function, 5-44
Increase
Brightness, 8-7
contrast, 8-7
Initial startup, 3-3
Initial value, tags, 6-28
Input
alphanumeric values, TP 270 6”, 4-7
numeric values , TP 270 6”, 4-5
H
Hardcopy, 2-2
Hardware Options, 11-2
Hazardous area, A-6
Index-6
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Index
Release 12/01
Installation, 9-1
Configuration computer, 9-12
electrical, 9-6
external keyboard, 9-16
external printer, 9-16
in 19” cabinets, 9-2
Mechanical, 9-1
mouse, 9-16
MP 270B Key, 9-2
MP 270B Touch, 9-5
OP 270 10”, 9-2
OP 270 6”, 9-2
PLC, 9-13
Printer, 9-15
TP 270 10”, 9-5
TP 270 6”, 9-5
Installation conditions, 9-1
Installation cut-out, A-2
MP 270B Key, 10-6
MP 270B Touch, 10-2
OP 270 10”, 10-6
TP 270 10”, 10-2
TP 270 6”, 10-4 , 10-8
Installation dimensions, 19” cabinets, 9-2
Installation location, 1-2 , 9-1
Interface assignment, B-1
Interfaces, 1-4 , 1-5
Configure IF1B, 9-14
IF1A, 9-13
IF1B, 9-13
IF2, 9-12
Interference-free, 9-6
Internet Explorer, 11-6
Interrupt, Trends, 5-35 , 5-36
Introduction, 1-1
Invisible buttons, 5-8
Irradiation, RF, A-5
Isolation, Electrical, 9-9
K
Key, Status button, 5-19
Key combinations, 4-17
Keyboard, 1-4 , 1-5 , A-3
connection, 9-16
Keyboard layout, 4-22 , 9-17
Keyboard levels, 4-7 , 4-8
Keypads, 4-11 , 4-12
L
Labeling
buttons, 5-17
Function keys, 10-9
Labeling strips, 9-2
MP 270B Key, 10-11
OP 270 10”, 10-11
OP 270 6”, 10-12
Landscape, printer, 8-12
Language
Function, 8-2
Set, 8-2
System messages, C-1
Language change, 8-2
Language setting, 8-11
Language-dependent objects, 8-2
LED, 4-21
Acknowledge, 4-16 , 5-22
Help text, 4-16
Shift, 4-16
LED assignment, 4-13
LEDs, function keys, 4-13
Length, message text, 2-1
Level, Password, 5-41
License transfer (authorization)
integrated ProSave, 3-19
ProSave, 3-18
Stand-alone ProSave, 3-18
Limit value check, 5-10
Limit value monitoring, 2-2
Limit values, Trend view, 5-34
Line, 5-7
List, passwords, 5-41
Literature, 1-6
Lithium battery, A-4
Warning note, 12-4
Load, project data, 3-3
Load application, 3-20
ProSave, 3-20
Stand-alone ProSave, 3-20
Load applications
Active Sync, 3-22
integrated ProSave, 3-21
Load_Data_Record, function, 6-20
Local function keys, 4-13
Location, A-4
Log on, 5-42
Login, 5-5 , 5-42
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Index-7
Index
Release 12/01
Logoff, 5-5 , 5-42
Logoff_user, Function, 5-5 , 5-42
Logout time, 5-5 , 5-42
Low-voltage, 9-9
M
Maintenance, 12-1
Management, passwords, 5-42
Manual download, 3-4
Mark, all, 4-18
Marking, Input field, 4-19
Maximum value, bar graph, 5-33
Mechanical installation, 9-1
Membrane keyboard, 1-4 , 1-5 , A-3
Memory, 1-4 , 1-5
Memory card, 6-7 , 6-15 , 11-4
backup/restore, 3-14
Memory extension, 1-4 , 1-5
Memory location, archive files, 7-2
Memory requirements, data records, 6-9
Menu bar, activate, 4-19
Message acquisition, 2-2
Message archive, 5-23
Message buffer, 2-1 , 5-23 , 5-29
archive, 2-2
Message categories, 5-22 , 5-31
Message display, 5-30
single, 5-32
Message editing, event, 5-26 , 5-31
Message events, 2-2 , 5-23
Message indicator, 5-2
Message line, 5-23 , 5-25
Message logging, 2-1 , 5-24
Message number, C-1
Message page, 5-23 , 5-28
Message view, 5-8 , 5-23
simple, 5-8
Message window, 5-3 , 5-23 , 5-25
Messages, 5-22
acknowledge, 5-26 , 5-31
buffering, 5-23
Delete, 5-23
display, 5-23
edit, 5-26 , 5-31
functional range, 2-1
HMI system messages, C-1
Print, 5-24
Minimum value, bar graph, 5-33
Modal dialogs, 3-5
Index-8
Mode, printer, 8-12
Mounting depth, A-2
Mouse
connection, 9-16
operation, 4-22
Mouse pointer, 4-22
MP 270B Key operation, 4-11
MP 270B Touch operation, 4-2
MPI address, download mode, 3-7
MPI transfer, 3-8
Multifunctional platform, 1-1
N
Navigation
buttons, 4-9
operating system, 4-18
Trend view, 5-35
Network connection, A-4
New_Data_Record, function, 6-20
NITP, 2-4
Noise immunity, A-5
non-return pointer, 5-39
Normal level, screen keyboard, 4-8
Number
data records, 2-3
data records per recipe, 6-8
fields per screen, 2-2
graphic lists, 2-3
HMI system message, C-1
languages, 2-4
messages, 2-1
passwords, 2-3
Recipes, 2-3
recipes, 6-8
screens, 2-2
scripts, 2-4
tags per screen, 2-2
text lists, 2-3
Numeric input field, 5-10
Numeric key assignment, 4-16
Numeric screen keyboard, 4-5 , 4-6
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Index
Release 12/01
O
Offline
editing data records, 6-21
Operating mode, 8-3
operating mode, 3-10
tags, 6-7
Offset, Status/Force, 5-46
Online
editing data records, 6-22
Operating mode, 8-3
operating mode, 3-11
Online languages, 2-4
OP 270 10”, dimensions, 10-6
OP 270 operation, 4-11
Open
screen, 5-4
selection fields, 4-18
Start menu, 4-18
tab control, 4-19
Task Manager, 4-18
Open_archive, function, 7-2
Operand, Status/Force, 5-46
Operating
screens, 5-1
screens and screen objects, 5-1
Operating element, 5-6 , 5-10
graphic box, 5-16
selection fields, 5-12
slider control, 5-37
status button, 5-19
switch, 5-21
Operating elements
button, 5-17
date/time, 5-14
recipe view, 6-12
Operating mode
Download, 8-3
Offline, 8-3
Online, 8-3
Setting, 8-3
Operating system, 1-1 , 1-4 , 1-5 , A-2
navigation, 4-18
update, 13-1
Operation
MP 270B Key, 4-11
MP 270B Touch, 4-2
OP 270, 4-11
touch elements, 4-2
TP 270, 4-2
unauthorized, 5-5 , 5-41
Operation acknowledgement, 4-3 , 5-17
Operator prompting, 2-3
Optical acknowledgement, 4-3
Optimize, brightness, 8-6
Option OP, 8-6
Options, 11-1
Backup battery, 11-2
CF card, 11-4
memory card, 11-4
PC card, 11-4
Output field, 5-6
Overheating, 9-2
Overview, units, 1-4
P
Page_Down, function, 4-9
Page_Up, function, 4-9
Paper size, 8-12
Parameters, system messages, C-1
Password
delete, 5-43
management, 5-42
set up, 5-43
Password hierarchy, 5-41
Password level, 5-41
Password list, 5-8 , 5-41
view, 5-43
password list, export/import, 5-43
Password protection, 2-3 , 5-5 , 5-41
Passwords
entry, 5-10
import/export, 5-43
number of, 2-3
Path specification, project file, 3-9
PC, Connecting, 9-12
PC card, 6-7 , 6-15 , 11-4 , A-2
PCL compatible, 9-15
PDB file, 3-12
PDZ file, 3-12
PE connection, 9-7
PELV, 9-9
Performance, archives, 7-3
Performance features, 1-4 , 1-5
Pin array, 9-9
Pin assignment, B-1
Plan view
MP 270B Key, 10-6
MP 270B Touch, 10-2
OP 270 10”, 10-6
OP 270 6”, 10-8
TP 270 10”, 10-2
TP 270 6”, 10-4
Plastic clamps, 9-4 , 9-5
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Index-9
Index
Release 12/01
PLC, Connect, 9-13
PLC jobs, 5-15 , 6-24
Plug connections, 9-6
Pointer instrument, 5-39
Polygon, 5-7
Polyline, 5-7
Port, printer, 8-12
Portrait, printer, 8-12
Positioning, 6-22
Power cables, 9-6
Power consumption, A-3
Power supply, 9-7 , 9-9 , A-3
Power supply unit, 9-9
Press, event, 5-17 , 5-19
Print, Messages, 5-24
Print functions, 2-3
Print quality, set, 8-12
Printer
Connect, 9-15
connection, 9-16
Set, 8-12
Process running phase, 1-3
Processor type, 1-4 , 1-5 , A-2
Product category, 1-1
PROFIBUS-DP, 2-4 , 9-13
Profiles, 9-2
Programming voltage, 11-4
Project data, load, 3-3
ProSave, 3-23
Backup/Restore, 3-15
License transfer (authorization), 3-18
load application, 3-20
Protection, password, 5-5 , 5-41
ProTool CS, 1-3
PTUpdate, utility program, 13-2
PtUpdate, operating system update, 13-2
PU, Connecting, 9-12
PU functions, 2-4
Pulse modulation, A-5
Purpose of recipes, 6-1
Q
Quality, graphics printout, 8-12
Quick selection of data records, 6-14
R
Radio interference, A-5
Radio interference level, A-5
Rated voltage, A-3
Index-10
Read, data record from PLC, 6-18
Read line
backwards, 5-36
forwards, 5-36
functions, 5-34
on/off, 5-35
Realtime trend, 5-34
Recipe functions
return values, 6-23
Status message, 6-24
Recipe screens, 6-19
Recipe view, 5-8 , 6-11 , 6-20
display, 6-11
operating elements, 6-12
Recipe_Tags_Online_Offline, Function, 6-20
Recipes, 2-3 , 6-1
Application examples, 6-4
Application scenarios, 6-3
change structure, 6-27
configuring, 6-7
data flow, 6-3
definition, 6-1 , 6-2
example, 6-2
name, 6-7
number, 6-8
overview, 6-1
Use, 6-3
Recommissioning, 3-4
Rectangle, 5-7
Reduce
Brightness, 8-7
contrast, 8-7
Relative humidity, A-4
Releasing, event, 5-17 , 5-19
Remaining capacity, Message buffer, 5-23
Remove, memory card, 7-4
Renaming, data records, 6-17
Reset, Password level, 5-42
Resolution, Display, 1-4 , 1-5 , A-3
Restore, 3-13
CF card, 3-15
Flash card, 3-15
integrated ProSave, 3-17
Stand-alone ProSave, 3-16
Return values, Recipe functions, 6-23
Reverse battery protection, 9-9
RF conduction, A-5
RF irradiation, A-5
RJ45 connector, B-2
RTS signal, 9-14
Runtime software, 3-9
load, 3-3
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Index
Release 12/01
S
Save, data record, 6-15
Save_Data_Record_from_Display, Functions,
6-20
Save_Data_Record_from_Display_as,
Function, 6-20
Save_Date_Record, function, 6-20
Scheduler, 2-4
Screen
brightness, 4-18
operation, 5-1
selection, 5-4
set brightness, 8-6
set contrast, 8-7
settings, 2-4
Screen change, 4-13
Screen diagonal, 1-4 , 1-5 , A-3
Screen keyboard, 4-3
alphanumeric, 4-7 , 4-8
MP 270B Key, 4-20
MP 270B Touch, 4-5 , 4-6
numeric, 4-5 , 4-6
OP 270, 4-20
set, 8-11
TP 270, 4-5 , 4-6
Screen objects, 2-2
operation, 5-1
Overview, 5-6
Screen partitions, 5-1
Screen saver, 8-9 , 8-10
Screens, operation, 5-1
Scripts, 2-4
Scroll, key, 4-17
Scroll back, key, 4-17
Scroll forward, key, 4-17
Scrolling, Trends, 5-35 , 5-36
Seal, 9-1 , 9-4 , 9-5
Section
Enlarge (trends), 5-36
zoom In (trend view), 5-35
zoom out (trend view), 5-35 , 5-36
Select, screen, 5-4
Selection field, 5-6 , 5-12
Selection fields, open, 4-18
Selection list, 5-12
SELV, 9-9
Separator , 6-24
Sequence archive, 7-3
Serial printer, 9-15
Serial zero modem cable, 13-2
Service life, Backup battery, 12-3
Set contrast, 8-7
Set up
network, 8-15
Password, 5-43
Printer, 8-12
Setting, Brightness, 4-18 , 8-6 , 8-7
Settings
Brightness, 8-7
brightness, 8-6
communication, 8-10
contrast, 4-18 , 8-6
Date/Time, 8-10
date/time, 5-14
Language, 8-2
language-specific, 8-11
network, 8-11
Operating mode, 8-3
Printer, 8-12
save, 8-8
screen keyboard, 8-11
system, 8-1
touch calibration, 8-6 , 8-7
volume, 8-11
Windows CE Control Panel, 8-4
Shift
Active window, 5-4
key, 4-16 , 4-17
Shift + Alt Gr level, screen keyboard, 4-8
Shift level, screen keyboard, 4-8
Shock loading, A-4
Show_alarm_message_buffer, Function, 5-29
Show_alarm_message_page, Function, 5-28
Show_event_message_buffer, Function, 5-29
Show_event_message_page, Function, 5-28
Side view
MP 270B Key, 10-6
MP 270B Touch, 10-2
OP 270 10”, 10-6
OP 270 6”, 10-8
TP 270 10”, 10-2
TP 270 6”, 10-4
Signal lines, 9-6
SIMATIC 505, 2-4
SIMATIC diagnostic events, 5-23
SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library, 5-9 , 5-48
SIMATIC S5, 2-4
SIMATIC S7, 2-4
Simple Message view, 5-8
Single message display, 5-32
Size, paper, 8-12
Slider control, 5-8 , 5-37
Slot A, 11-4
Slot B, 11-4
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Index-11
Index
Release 12/01
Softkeys, 1-4 , 1-5 , 4-13
Software, A-2
Software Option, 11-6
Sorting
Message buffer, 5-29
Message page, 5-28
password list, 5-43
Source file
Downloaded back, 3-12
storage location, 3-9
Special character, key, 4-17
Spreadsheet program, 6-24
Square, 5-7
Standard cable, 9-12
Standards, A-5
Start, Update trends, 5-35
Start menu, 3-6
Start screen, 3-3
Start Screen Keyboard, function, 4-4 , 4-20
Start_archive, Function, 7-2
Start_sequence_archive, function, 7-2
Static discharge, A-5
State view, 5-7
Static screen partitions, 5-1
Status button, 5-7 , 5-19
Status change, event, 5-19 , 5-21
Status message, Recipe functions, 6-24
Status value, 5-46
Status/Force, 5-8 , 5-45
Stop, Update trends, 5-35
Stop_archive, Function, 7-2
Storage location
archive files, 7-2
data records, 6-7 , 6-15
project file, 3-9
runtime software, 3-9
Storage media, 11-4 , A-2
Storage medium, source file, 3-9
Sub-D plug, B-2
Sub-D socket, B-1
Sunlight, 9-2
Superuser, 5-41
Supply source, Backup battery, 12-3
Surge connection, A-5
Switch, 5-7 , 5-21
for interface IF1B, 9-14
Status button, 5-19
Switch off
back-lighting, 8-10
voltage supply, 11-5
Switch setting, interface IF1B, 9-14
Switched off, event, 5-21
Index-12
Switched on, event, 5-21
Symbol Library, 5-48
Symbolic output field, 5-6
Symbolic value, entry, 5-12
Synchronization
data records, 6-8
date/time, 5-15
Synchronize, data record, 6-19
Synchronize_Data_Record_in_Display,
Function, 6-20
System keys, 1-4 , 1-5 , 4-11 , 4-12 , 4-14
System limits, 6-8
System messages, 5-3 , 5-22 , 5-26
System Settings, 8-1
T
Tabulator, Key, 4-16
Tags
initial value, 6-28
offline, 6-7
synchronizing, 6-7
Task Manager, 4-18
Technical Data, A-1
Terminal block, 9-9
Test
configuration, 3-10
network, 8-17
Text, 5-6
Text editor, 6-24
Thickness, Front panel, 9-1 , 10-2 , 10-4 ,
10-6, 10-8
Time, 3-3 , 5-10 , 5-14
synchronization, 5-15
Time specification
Date/Time, 5-40
date/time, 5-14
Time stamp, 5-28 , 5-29
Time/Date, 5-6 , 8-10
Tips of recipe views, 6-14
Torque, 9-4 , 9-5
Touch elements, operation, 4-2
Touch screen, calibrate, 8-7
TP 270 operation, 4-2
Transients, A-3
Trend view, 5-8 , 5-34
uncertain status, 5-34
Trend type, 5-34
Trend_view_read_mark_backward, functions,
5-34
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Release 12/01
Index
Trend_view_read_mark_forward, functions,
W
5-34
Weight, A-2
Trend_view_read_mark_on_off, functions, 5-34
Windows CE, 1-1 , 8-4 , A-2
Triggering, Trends, 5-34
Windows CE Control Panel, 8-4
WINS server, 8-15
Working memory, A-2
U
Writing, data records to PLC, 6-19
UL Approval, A-6
UL approval, A-6
Unauthorized use, 5-5 , 5-41
Z
Uncertain status, trend view, 5-34
Zero modem cable, 13-2
Unit dimensions
Zoom
MP 270B Key, 10-6
trend view, 5-35
MP 270B Touch, 10-2
Trends, 5-36
OP 270 10”, 10-6
Zoom in, trend view, 5-35
OP 270 6”, 10-8
Zoom out, trend view, 5-35 , 5-36
TP 270 10”, 10-2
TP270 6”, 10-4
Update
date/time, 3-3 , 5-14
operating system, 13-1
Status/Force, 5-46
Trends, 5-35
Upkeep, 12-1
UPS, 8-13
USB interface, 9-16
assignment, B-2
USB keyboard, 4-22
MP 270B Touch, 4-4
TP270, 4-4
USB mouse, 4-22
Use, Recipes, 6-3
Use_Screen_Keyboard_On/Off, functions, 4-4
Utility program, PTUpdate, 13-2
V
VB Script, 2-4
Vector graphics, 5-7
Ventilation slits, 9-2
Vibration, A-4
View, password list, 5-43
Virtual key, 5-17
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0
Index-13
Index
Index-14
Release 12/01
Multi Panel MP 270B, Touch Panel TP 270, Operator Panel OP 270 Equipment Manual
6AV6591-1DC20-0AB0